Sei sulla pagina 1di 370

APOLLO

0051

Service Manual
Version 27 April 2005 (Rev. 2)

APOLLO

0051

Service Manual
This Manual belongs to Apollo equipment serial No.
Version 27 April 2005 (Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Revision history

Revision history
Rev.

Date

Page/s

14.01.05

29.03.05

6-2, 6-14, 6-44, 17-5,


from 22-129 to 22-145

Modification description
Document approval.
A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout and
wiring diagram update.
Parameter 74 update in Inverter setting.
Description of basement grubs
regulation.
(Ref. RDM 6040, RDM 6078, RDM 6092)

27.04.05

4-6, 4-11, 6-44, 7-1, 8-1,


8-3, 9-2, 11-10, 11-13,
11-16, 11-25, 11-26, 13-6,
13-10, da 22-9 a 22-45,
22-49, da 22-69 a 22-77,
da 22-81 a 22-95

Change of min and max height of


compressor cone with respect to table
top.
Release of SW Version 1.03 (correcting
some minor bugs and introducing some
improvements).
Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
(Ref. RDM 6008, RDM 6103, RDM 6104)

(Rev. 2)

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Revision history

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

(Rev. 1)

SERVICE MANUAL
Contents

Contents
1

INTRODUCTION
1.1
1.2

3-1

ID plates ..............................................................................................3-1
Description ..........................................................................................3-3

4-1

Technical features................................................................................4-1
Formats division table in centimeters...................................................4-8
Formats division table in inches...........................................................4-9
Standards and regulations................................................................. 4-10
Dimensions........................................................................................ 4-11

PRE-INSTALLATION
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Warnings .............................................................................................2-2
Radioprotection warnings ....................................................................2-5
Environmental risks and disposal ........................................................2-8
Used symbols.......................................................................................2-8

TECHNICAL DATA
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5

2-1

DESCRIPTION
3.1
3.2

Symbols used in this manual...............................................................1-1


How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service ................1-2

SAFETY ASPECTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

1-1

5-1

Space requirements .............................................................................5-3


Electrical provisions.............................................................................5-6
Adaptation to the mains voltage ...........................................................5-7
Environmental conditions ....................................................................5-7

INSTALLATION
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6

Base positioning with beam and column ..............................................6-2


Assembly of the Tube support arm.......................................................6-5
Spot film device assembly ....................................................................6-6
Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly ......................... 6-10
Machine cable connection .................................................................. 6-12
Image intensifier installation.............................................................. 6-23
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3

6.7

(Rev. 0)

6-1

9-12 fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation ..................................6-24


16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model).............6-26
Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation .......................................6-28
6.6.3.1
9 with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation.................6-28
6.6.3.2
12 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation................6-30
6.6.3.3
16 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation................6-32

Installation of the Tube - Collimator group......................................... 6-34

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Contents

6.8 Mounting the covers...........................................................................6-38


6.9 Tabletop assembly..............................................................................6-43
6.10 Final verifications...............................................................................6-44

THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE


7.1

Functioning sequences.........................................................................7-2
7.1.1
7.1.2

7.2

10

Generation of a condition alarm........................................................7-5


Generation of a operating alarm........................................................7-5
Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit ..........................7-6

IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION


8.1
8.2

Powering up and initialisation sequence............................................7-2


Activation sequence for a movement .................................................7-3

Fault Conditions ..................................................................................7-5


7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3

7-1

8-1

Output signals from the Apollo table ....................................................8-1


Input signals towards the Apollo table..................................................8-3

CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF


THE DATA GROUPS

9-1

ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA

10-1

10.1 Potmeter adjustment..........................................................................10-4


10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.1.7
10.1.8
10.1.9
10.1.10
10.1.11
10.1.12
10.1.13
10.1.14

11

Cell data and list ............................................................................10-5


ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 102).......................10-8
SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 104) ...................................10-9
MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment
(cells 105 108) ........................................................................... 10-10
TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment
(cells 111 112) ........................................................................... 10-14
SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment
(cells 113 114) ........................................................................... 10-15
WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 118)......... 10-16
HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 120) ...... 10-17
IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter
adjustment (cells 121 122) ......................................................... 10-18
COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 124)...... 10-19
GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 126) ................................. 10-20
CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 128) ............. 10-21
10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment ............... 10-22
CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 130) ........ 10-24
SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 132) .......................... 10-25

ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS


(EXCEPT GROUP 100)

11-1

11.1 Group 200 Installation data.............................................................11-3


11.1.1

APOLLO

Function of the parameters of group 200 ........................................11-3

ii

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Contents

11.2 Group 300 PDI controlled motor data ............................................ 11-17


11.2.1
11.2.2

Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control...........................11-17


Motors check data function...........................................................11-21

11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 Dimensions and runs............................... 11-24


11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4

11.3.5

Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback ..11-24


Equipment mechanical dimensions...............................................11-27
Data relative to single fault potmeter controls................................11-31
Spot film device cassette and shutters run ....................................11-35
11.3.4.1
Calculation of the cassette run ....................................11-36
11.3.4.2
Calculation of the shutters run....................................11-41
Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements.................................11-43

11.4 Position 701 EEprom copy ............................................................ 11-45


11.5 Position 711 Clock settings and reset alarm memory..................... 11-46
11.6 Position 721 Test spot film device and table life............................. 11-47
11.6.1
11.6.2

Spot film device test......................................................................11-48


Table test .....................................................................................11-50

11.7 Position 731 Remote service function ............................................ 11-52


11.8 Position 751 Alarms memory......................................................... 11-53
11.9 Position 850 Table cycles memory ................................................. 11-61

12

SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC

12-1

13

FUNCTIONALITY

13-1

13.1 Collision............................................................................................. 13-1


13.1.1

Anticollision barrier ........................................................................13-5

13.2 Compressor........................................................................................ 13-6


13.3 Collimator .......................................................................................... 13-7
13.4 Table automatic positioning ............................................................. 13-10

14

OPERATING MODE

14-1

14.1 Spot film device.................................................................................. 14-1


14.1.1
14.1.2

"Standard radiography" performance block diagram ........................14-2


"Rapid sequence" block diagram......................................................14-3

14.2 Standard tomographic ....................................................................... 14-4


14.2.1
14.2.2

"Standard tomography" block diagram ............................................14-5


"Sequential tomography" block diagram ..........................................14-6

14.3 Direct................................................................................................. 14-7


14.4 Digital ................................................................................................ 14-8
14.4.1

"Digital radiography" block diagram ................................................14-9

14.5 Digital Tomography.......................................................................... 14-10


14.5.1
14.5.2

"Digital tomography" block diagram ..............................................14-11


"Digital tomography" block diagram ..............................................14-12

14.6 Angiographic.................................................................................... 14-13


14.6.1

15

"Stepping angio" block diagram.....................................................14-14

EMERGENCY END RUN

(Rev. 0)

15-1
iii

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Contents

16

HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT

16-1

16.1 A3 output PCB ...................................................................................16-1


16.1.1
16.1.2

Collimator axle speed adjustment ...................................................16-1


Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction) .........16-3

16.2 Compressor PCB ................................................................................16-4

17

THREE-PHASE INVERTER

17-1

17.1 Inverter input/output functions .........................................................17-2


17.2 Inverter hardware setting ...................................................................17-3
17.3 Inverter software parameters setting ..................................................17-3
17.3.1
17.3.2

Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali..................17-4


Parameters that maintain the default settings .................................17-6

17.4 Access to parameters for writing ........................................................17-7


17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters ..................................17-8

18

FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS

18-1

19

CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS

19-1

19.1 Spot film device adjustment ...............................................................19-1


19.1.1
19.1.2
19.1.3

Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette ......................19-2


Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette........................19-3
Checking the positioning of the shutters .........................................19-3

19.2 Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field ..............................19-4


19.2.1

Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm..................19-4

19.3 Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam...........................................19-6


19.4 Collimator adjustment .......................................................................19-8

20

DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

20-1

20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses ............................................20-3


20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by
the processor ...................................................................................20-39
20.2.1
20.2.2
20.2.3

21

Table............................................................................................ 20-39
Spot film device ............................................................................ 20-41
Collimator .................................................................................... 20-44

MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

21-1

21.1 Maintenance the operator can carry out.............................................21-2


21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician ...21-3

22

WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS

22-1

22.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings .................................................22-2

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or


translated without the prior written consent of Villa Sistemi Medicali.
This manual is the English translation of the Italian original manual version.
APOLLO

iv

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Introduction

INTRODUCTION

NOTE:
This manual has been updated to reflect the state of the product with
which it is sold, to provide a proper reference while troubleshooting and
repair operations, commonly carried out by the service engineer, are
being performed.
The manual might not reflect variations to the product if they do not
affect how it works.
The remote controlled table Apollo is an X-ray equipment that allows to
perform general X-ray examinations. In particular, because of its
connected accessories, the equipment is an optimal solution for
examinations where the use of contrast liquids is required.
The present manual provides the user with instructions for a safe and
efficient use of the equipment.
The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures
contained in the manual and shall never be used for other purposes than
those provided by the manual itself.
Apollo is an electromedical equipment and, as such, it can be used
solely under the supervision of a physician or of highly qualified
personnel with the necessary competence in matter of protection from
X-rays.
The user is responsible for the fulfilment of the legal requirements
regulating the installation and the functioning of the equipment itself.

1.1

Symbols used in this manual

*
,

(Rev. 0)

Indicates a NOTE; please pay particular attention when reading the


topics identified by such symbol.

Indicates a WARNING; topics identified by this symbol refer to the


patient and/or operator safety aspects.

1-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Introduction

1.2

How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical


service
For any technical queries please contact the following:

APOLLO

Telephone number +39 02 488591

Fax number +39 02 48859222

E-mail: service_support@villasm.com

1-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

SAFETY ASPECTS

WARNING:
All information contained in the present chapter must be carefully read
and, where provided, must be applied in order to avoid damage to the
equipment or to people.
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in
compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary
information for an appropriate use and warnings about the dangers
associated with X-ray generators.
Villa Sistemi Medicali does not take any responsibility for:

the use of Apollo equipment different from the one it was originally
designed for

damages to the equipment, to the operator, to the patient caused by


both wrong installation and maintenance not in conformity with the
procedures contained in the equipment's user and maintenance
manuals, and by incorrect operating techniques

mechanical and/or electrical modifications performed during or after


installation.

Only Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel can provide


technical assistance for the equipment.
Only authorised personnel may remove the protections of the
electrical cabinet and of the equipment, and access the parts under
tension and the moving parts.

(Rev. 0)

2-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

2.1

Warnings
Apollo is suited for use in hospital, therefore the line connection may not
be carried out in buildings with domestic-type power supply lines.
The equipment was not designed to be used in the presence of vapours,
anaesthetic mixtures inflammable when in contact with air, oxygen or
nitrous oxide.
In order to prevent risks of short-circuit and corrosion, avoid the
infiltration of water of other liquids in the equipment.
Before cleaning the equipment, always ensure it is disconnected from the
line.
All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic
microprocessor system. Speeds, positions, starts and stops of these
movements are controlled and managed by the equipment's logic. Safety
aspects are fundamental in this logic in order to ensure the maximum
safety both for the patient and the operator. Nevertheless, the operator
MUST ALWAYS PAY CLOSE ATTENTION when a movement is activated.
Press the EMERGENCY red buttons located on the control console and
on the front side of the equipment in case of danger. These buttons will
immediately stop any movement and function. They are a valid
instrument for the operator in addition to the intrinsic safety devices of
the equipment.
Before activating motorised parts, such as the tilting, the tabletop,
or the angulation, ensure that the patient is correctly positioned
and that their legs and arms are positioned within the shape of the
tabletop. If possible, use the support handgrips. During the motorised
movements, no objects interfering with the movements should be in
proximity of the table.
Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room.
Although Apollo was designed with a high degree of protection from
electromagnetic interference, the equipment must be installed at a
certain distance from the electrical energy transformation cabins, from
static uninterruptible power supplies, from walkie-talkies and cellular
phones. The latter two may only be used at the distances from any
element of the equipment reported in the following page.

APOLLO

2-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

R.F. source power

Distance (m)

10 mW
100 mW
1W
10 W
100 W

0.3
1
3
8
30

Instruments or systems used in close proximity to Apollo must be in


compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility regulations. Noncompliant instruments, with known scarce immunity to electromagnetic
fields, must be installed at a distance of at least 3m from Apollo and
must be powered through a dedicated electric line.
Apollo is suited for use in the following electromagnetic environment:
Electromagnetic
emissions

Conformity

EMC usage environment

Irradiated and
conducted emissions

A class

CISPR 11

Group I

Emitted harmonic
EN 61000-3-2

Complying

Flicker EN 61000-3-3
tension/emission
fluctuations
EN 60601-1-2 immunity
(EN 61000-4-2 /3 /4 /5
/6 /8 /11)

Complying

Apollo can be connected to a power


supply line different from the domestic
line.
Apollo generates Radio Frequency
energy only for internal functioning. The
generated R.F. level does not cause
interference with the electrical devices
used nearby.
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.

Complying

In case of line voltage dips that last longer than what can be sustained by
the table electronic control system, the examination in progress may be
cancelled. As a consequence, the tabletop and scan movements, as well
as the angulation, that may cause damage to the patient become
inhibited. The spot film device will be initialised and, in case the cassette
is loaded, on the display a warning will ask the operator to remove it
before proceeding.

(Rev. 0)

2-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

Apollo cannot be installed in operating theatres.


Apollo must be powered off when using the electrosurgery cutter or
similar devices.
Clean and, when necessary, disinfect the parts that may come into
contact with the patient by following the procedures provided in the
chapter 21.

APOLLO

2-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

2.2

Radioprotection warnings
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in
compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary
information and warnings about the dangers associated with equipment
connected to X-ray generators.
The personnel authorised to perform X-ray examinations must observe
all regulations regarding the protection against ionizing radiation as
reported below:

Use dedicated protections (leaded clothing) to protect the patient from


X-rays diffused in the areas adjacent to the one to be X-rayed.

During X-ray examinations, only the patient is allowed to stay in the


room. Medical and paramedic personnel or specifically authorised
personnel, if required by the examination, may also be present only if
wearing radioprotective clothing. The personnel in the room, during
the examination in progress, must stay in the areas indicated in the
figures below.

8
7
6

Occupation area
(see Figure 2-2)

5
4
3

2
1

Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view

(Rev. 0)

NOTE:
The front view shows a 600x600x2000 mm occupation area as specified
by the applied regulations. In reality, because the I.I. spot film device,
tube group has an excursion of 1600 mm, the total occupation zone is
the one showed in Figure 2-2. Such area takes into account the abovementioned excursion.

2-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

Occupation area
600x2380 mm
H = 2000 mm

Figure 2-2: Horizontal table, plan view

Occupation area
(see Figure 2-4)

G
F
E
D
C
1400 mm

B
A

Figure 2-3: Vertical table, front view

APOLLO

2-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

450 mm

Occupation area
600x600 mm
H = 1700 mm

Figure 2-4: Vertical table, plan view


The maximum values of the radiation diffused in the indicated areas are
reported in the following table.
Such values have been detected as reported in the safety regulation
IEC 601-1-3 and, in particular, for technique factors of 120 kV, 3 mA
continuative emission.

(Rev. 0)

Fig

Ref.

H from the ground


(mm)

Dosage
(mGy/h)

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

350
600
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
350
600
1000
1200
1400
1600
1700

0.06
0.09
2.75
10.5
13.9
13.4
9.6
6.2
1.1
1.9
3.3
4.1
4.4
4.1
3.5

2-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects

2.3

Environmental risks and disposal


Some of Apollo components contain material and liquid that, at the end
of the equipment life-cycle, must be disposed of at the recycling centres
appointed by the Local Health Units.
In particular, the equipment contains the following materials and/or
components:

Reducers: lubricating oil, steel, aluminium


Motor: iron, copper, hard plastic material casings
Electric cabinet: iron, aluminium, copper, non-biodegradable
plastics, vetronite for printed circuits

The disposal of the discarded equipment and relative costs are not
chargeable to Villa Sistemi Medicali.

2.4

Used symbols

Symbol

Description
Equipment with Type B applied parts

N
R S T

Alternating current
Neutral conductor connection point
Three-phase line conductors connection point
Ground-fault protection
Warning: consult the accompanying
documentation
Dangerous voltage

APOLLO

2-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Description

DESCRIPTION

3.1

ID plates

7
3
4

5
1b

(Rev. 0)

3-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Description

1a

1b

Apollo features plate


(located on the electric cabinet)

Apollo ID plate
(located on the equipment)

Spot Film Device


features plate

Collimator
features plate

"Mechanical moving parts"


plate

5
Total filtration
plate

6
"Connect TV chain only"
plate
(inside the electric cabinet)

7
Compression coupling
ID plate

APOLLO

3-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Description

3.2

Description
The remote controlled Apollo table is the latest development of remote
controlled tables produced by Villa Sistemi Medicali.
The most recent features applied to this type of tables have been
incorporated and further improved. In particular:

the mechanical construction

the cassette's loading/unloading inside the SFD

the removal of components' numerous supporting frames, so that the


components become "self-supporting".
The fundamental functional concepts of the Apollo table are:
smallest possible space occupied
patient coverage simply through the longitudinal movement of the U
arc

elevating tabletop with parts rotation system as opposed to sliding


system

modern, concept winning appearance and design

operator's rear access without barriers towards the patient

reduced skin-to-film distance

carbon fibre or plastic tabletops with slight curvature and integrated


accessories holder profiles

reduced I.I.-film distance to avoid the parallax correction

reduced-dimension console with new functional concepts.

Movements and complex functions are controlled by the remote-control


console located in the protected X-ray area.
The main table movements are replicated on the control panel on the side
of the table.
All electric and electronic control and logic components, except for the
console, are grouped in a single electric cabinet, which also houses the
control modules for the system accessories.
The Apollo table is equipped with a spot film device that permits the use
of commonly used cassettes of any type.
The format division program is very complete and is described in another
paragraph.
An automatic collimator, controlled by a central logic, sets the limits for
the irradiated area.
The collimator can be of square-rectangular collimation type or iris type,
which has circular field collimation in addition to square rectangular
collimation.
To meet the requirements of fluoroscopic modality and image acquisition
by means of digital systems, the table is setup to accept image
intensifiers from a minimum of 9" (nominal) maximum input field up to a
maximum of 16" (nominal).

(Rev. 0)

3-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Description

The intensifier is fixed by default by docking it to the spot film device, by


means of an upper mount anchor plate. As an option, a device called
"elevating tabletop I.I." is available. This allows to raise the input surface
of the I.I closer to the patient when the cassette is not in the exposure
position.
All movement controls are of "dead man" type.
Apollo was designed and built in compliance with European directives
for obtaining the CE mark as specified in the European Directive 93/42
for Medical Devices, guaranteeing the highest safety for both the operator
and the patient.
Apollo is a universal table for radiological diagnosis, built to satisfy all
needs. It can be employed for the examination of the digestive tract, of
the cranium, and of the skeleton, urographies, myelographies, vascular
and lungs examinations, bronchography. When fitted with a digital
acquisition system, it can also be used for angiographies.
The ID code of the equipment varies according to the type of collimator
and to the voltage.
Apollo is available with both standard and optional accessories. The
following table lists all the accessories and divides them as standard, i.e.
those usually coming with the equipment, and optional accessories,
which must be specifically requested when ordering the equipment.
Ref.
A
B
C
D
E

Description

Type of
accessory

Block patient footrest


Headrest
Patient support handgrip (N. 2 pieces)
Leg rest (N. 2 pieces)
Band-tensioner with compression
band

Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional

All accessories are easily applied as they are mounted directly on the
tabletop's profile.
APOLLO

3-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

TECHNICAL DATA

4.1

Technical features

General features
Type of equipment

Apollo

Manufacturer

Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.


20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy

Type of equipment and classification in


compliance with IEC 60601-1 standard
regulation
Grade of protection in compliance with
IEC 60529 standard regulation

class I with Type B applied


parts
equipment non protected against
penetration of liquids

Operating mode

continuous functioning

Use

equipment not suitable for use in


presence of inflammable
anaesthetic mixtures

Electric features
Standard voltage

3N~ 380-400 Vac 10%

Optional voltage

3N~ 415-480 Vac 10%

Frequency

50-60 Hz

Maximum current

7 A @ 380-400 Vac 10%


6 A @ 415-480 Vac 10%

Fuses on safety isolating transformer

8 AT @ 380-400 Vac
7 AT @ 415-480 Vac

Equipment protection

8 A with magnetothermic

Power

6 kVA

Line impedance

< 1.0 @ 380-400 Vac 10%


< 1.0 @ 415-480 Vac 10%

Load voltage drop

< 2 % @ 380-400 Vac 10%


< 2 % @ 415-480 Vac 10%

(Rev. 0)

4-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

Mechanical features
Weight

895 Kg

Height vertical table

2500 mm

Height horizontal table and max SID

3180 mm

Width from the front end of the spot film


device to the rear end of the main beam

1590 mm

Total width completely retracted

1920 mm

Length (horizontal table)

2420 mm

Total length with +90 /-90 max SID

4960 mm

Setup for I.I.

standard fixed mount


optional lift

I.I. max size

16 inch

Minimum tabletop height from the ground


(with spot film device)

Minimum tabletop height from the ground


(digital mod.)

minimum
with 9" I.I.
with 12" I.I.
with 16" I.I.

CENTRE
600 mm
600 mm
695 mm
775 mm

EDGE
668 mm
668 mm
763 mm
843 mm

minimum
with 9" I.I.
with 12" I.I.
with 16" I.I.

CENTRE
600 mm
600 mm
637 mm
717 mm

EDGE
668 mm
668 mm
705 mm
785 mm

Max height tabletop centre from the ground

1400 mm

Distance tabletop centre upper side beam

185 mm

Distance upper tabletop edge


upper side beam

117 mm

Distance rear side beam


765 mm
internal tabletop edge (with centered tabletop)
Distance rear side beam
internal tabletop edge (with internal tabletop
end run)

605 mm

Electric cabinet containing all electric and


electronics controls, including the TV-chain
control or the digital module

520 x 550 x 1950 mm

Max patient weight with moving equipment

150 kg

APOLLO

4-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

Runs
Tilting

+ 90 / - 90

Lift

800 mm with pantograph system

Longitudinal tabletop

fixed

Transversal tabletop

320 mm

Scan

1600 mm

Source-to-film distance

1000 - 1500 mm

Angulation

+ 40 / - 40

Compressor (cone run in X-ray field)

320 mm

Tube rotation

+ 180 / - 90

I.I. lift

38 mm

Speed
Tilting

slow 4.5 /sec


fast 6.5 /sec (adjustable)

Lift

15 mm/sec (adjustable)

Transversal tabletop

30 mm/sec 10% (fixed)

Scan

from 30 mm/sec to 200 mm/sec


(adjustable) with speeding step for small
or wide movements

Source-to-film distance

35 mm/sec 10% (fixed)

Angulation

11.2 mm/sec (adjustable)

Compressor

25 mm/sec (adjustable)

I.I. lift (optional)

40 mm/sec 20% (fixed)

(Rev. 0)

4-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

Features data and measures


Distance X-ray field centre /
table head extremity

390 mm

Distance X-ray field centre /


table feet extremity

390 mm

Skin-to-film distance

65 mm

Film-to-fixed I.I. distance

19 mm (without parallax correct.)

Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I.

84 mm

Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift


completely lowered

84 mm

Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift


completely lifted
Minimum distance compressor cone
tabletop
Max distance compressor cone
tabletop
Compression force

choice of 45 mm or 65 mm
90 mm
410 mm
from 3 kg to 15 kg with 0.5 kg step

Tabletop
Size

2379 x 750 mm

Radio-transparent area size

2214 x 650 mm

Standard material

policarbonate

Optional material

carbon fibre with Rohacell filler

Filtration for standard model

< 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV


2.7 mm Al

Filtration for carbon fibre model

< 0.3 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV


2.7 mm Al

Accessories holder guides

integrated

Surface

smooth with curvature for both models

APOLLO

4-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

Accessories
Footrest (standard)

support surface 400 x 600 mm ca with


sliding mounts for the tabletop profile

Headrest and shoulder rest (standard)

with cushions and shaped shoulder


stoppers integrated with sliding mounts
for the table profile

Plastic ergonomic handgrips (standard)

with sliding mounts for the table profile

Compression band (optional)

with winder with sliding mounts for the


tabletop profile

Adjustable thighs holder (optional)

with sliding mounts for the tabletop


profile

Side cassette holder for oblique


projections (optional)

with adjustable cassette holder arm

Spot film device


Accepted cassette sizes

from 13 x 18 to 35 x 43

Divisions on a line

from 1 to 4

Crossed divisions

in 4 and in 6

Spot film device movement

with feed belts without tray

Operating mode

standard program and rapid sequence

Minimum fluoro-to-exposure switching


time

0.8 sec

Maximum fluoro-to-exposure switching


time
Average speed in rapid sequence

1.2 sec
2 im/sec

Leaded shutters

integrated

Grid

vibrating, parkable

Head I.I. fixing

pre-set

AEC

pre-set

(Rev. 0)

4-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

Collimator
Standard collimation
Optional collimation
Limitation

Operating mode

Light for centering


Minimum dimension X-ray field @ 1 m
X-ray field coverage @ 1 m
Stray radiation
Total filtration rectangular collimator
Total filtration iris collimator

rectangular and square


rectangular, square and iris
automatic
manual: by means of joystick on
console and buttons on collimator
(rectangular), buttons on console
(iris)
automatic
automatic with Hold mode
manual
with timed 100W lamp (min 160 lux @
1 m) or with on-demand switching off
< 1 cm2
> 43 cm2
45 mR/h @ 150 kVp 350W
0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al
1.0 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al

Tomography
Type
Layer max height
Layer increment
Layer automatic increment
Speed
Angles
Tomography exposure times

Direction
Sequential tomography

Scan movement range

APOLLO

semiarc / plane with electronic


algorithm
350 mm
with 1 mm step
selectable with automatic increment
depending on the tomo angle
11.2 22.4 /sec (adjustable)
7 - 20 - 30 - 45
Grades
1st speed
2nd speed
625 msec
312 msec
7
1780 msec
892 msec
20
2670 msec
1330 msec
30
4000 msec
2000 msec
45
from right to left or vice versa
(adjustable)
sequential program with forward and
back exposures until divisions are
completed with continuous layer
automatic increment and return to the
vertical position at the end of each
exposure without stops
tomography is allowed for variable scan
positions depending on the selected
angle and layer

4-6

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

Stepping angio (optional)


Modality

only with digital acquisition system

Automatic

step length: depending on the


selected I.I.
manual: adjustable with 1 mm step

Direction

selectable

Interface

integrated with digital generator and


scan

Controls
Console movements

controls with joystick on table side with


buttons

Console functions

controls

User interface

with graphic display, function keys and


LED signalling

Controls type

"Dead man"

Safety on movements

single fault on the HW chain driving


movement and feedback

Environmental conditions
Operating conditions

Temperature:
Humidity:
Pressure:

from +10 to +40


from 30 to 75 %
from 700 to 1060 hPa

Conditions for transport and storage

Temperature:
Humidity:
Pressure:

from -20 to +70


95% non condensing
> 630 hPa

(Rev. 0)

4-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

4.2

Formats division table in centimeters

APOLLO

13x18

18x13

18x24

9x24

9x12

24x24

12x24

12x12

24x30

12x30

30x24

30x30

15x30

10x30

18x43

43x18

21x18

14x18

15x40

40x15

20x15

13x15

10x15

20x40

10x40

40x20

20x20

13x20

10x20

30x35

15x35

10x35

35x30

17x30

12x30

30x40

15x40

10x40

40x30

20x30

13x30

35x35

17x35

12x35

35x43

17x43

12x43

43x35

21x35

14x35

24x18

12x18

15x24

15x12

10x24

10x12

10x30

NOTE:
The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction
(patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is
nominal.

4-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

4.3

Formats division table in inches

(Rev. 0)

5x7

7x5

8x10

4x10

4x5

10x8

5x8

10x12

5x12

12x10

6x10

6x5

9.5x9.5

4.7x9.5

3x9.5

7x17

17x7

8.5x7

5.7x7

4.3x7

11x14

5.5x14

3.7x14

14x11

14x14

7x14

4.7x14

14x17

7x17

4.7x17

17x14

4x10

4x5

7x11

4.7x11

3.5x11

8.5x14

5.7x14

NOTE:
The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction
(patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is
nominal.

4-9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

4.4

Standards and regulations


Apollo was designed and built in compliance with the following
regulations:
EN
EN
EN
EN

60601-1 (IEC 601-1)


60601-1-2 (IEC 601-1-2)
60601-1-3 (IEC 601-1-3)
60601-2-32 (IEC 601-2-32)
0051

APOLLO

The EC symbol certifies the conformity of Apollo to


Directive 93/42/EEC.

4-10

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

4.5

Dimensions

A: with IB 9 600mm min. 1400mm max


with IB 12 695mm min. 1400mm max
with IB 16 775mm min. 1400mm max
B: with IB 9 1880mm min. 2680mm max
with IB 12 1975mm min. 2680mm max
with IB 16 2055mm min. 2680mm max

Figure 4-1

(Rev. 2)

4-11

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

4-12

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

PRE-INSTALLATION
The instructions on the following pages guarantee that the installation
performed will ensure the remote-controlled Apollo table will work
properly.
The Manufacturer can provide any technical consultancy and assistance
necessary right from the pre-installation stage (if requested, to check the
positioning of the equipment inside the X-ray room).
The room should be prepared for the installation of the Apollo table
according to the choice of the most suitable floor plate (Figure 5-1 and
Figure 5-2).
The standard floor fixing plate (Figure 5-1) is suitable for slabs with a
bearing capacity of more than 2400kg/m2 (weight of machine fitted with
16" IB and considering a patient of 150kg = 1160kg on a support surface
of 0.48m2).
Remove the surface of the floor in an area measuring 420 x 1310 mm
until you reach the concrete of the slab, so that the top surface of the
plate are flush with the floor.
The concrete surface of the slab, under the plate, must be rough enough
to ensure the concrete to be poured adheres properly. Position the plate
and carefully level it so that the surface obtained is as level as possible.
The plate already has threaded holes and M16 bolts for the anchorage of
the base; these holes must be protected (e.g. by inserting the fixing bolts)
so that they are not blocked up during installation; pour the concrete
with a cement/sand ratio of 1:2.5, remove the surplus and let it dry for
six hours.

Figure 5-1: Standard floor fixing plate

(Rev. 0)

5-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

If the bearing capacity of the slab is not sufficient (less than 2400kg/m2),
a weight distribution plate is available and must be requested at the time
of the order (purchase code 5584902500 - Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2: Weight distribution plate


This plate can be installed on the floor in two different ways:
1. Sunk into the floor
2. Fixed to the floor.
In the first case (1) follow the instructions given above for a plate of a
smaller size and be sure to remove the upper surface of the floor over an
area of 2700 x 1600 mm.
In the second case (2), the plate must be fixed to the floor taking
advantage of the relative fixing holes and masked through the
construction of raised section that covers the structure of the plate itself.

APOLLO

NOTE:
The weight distribution plate is not symmetrical, so its important to
position it in the correct way (Figure 5-2).

5-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

5.1

Space requirements

NOTE:
In order to unload the main body of the device from the truck, it is
necessary either that the truck has an elevating lift or to use an elevating
fork cart.
When performing the overview of the location (installation room, aisles,
doors ecc.) please remind that the main body of the device after having
removed the wood box has dimensions given in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3
The minimum height of the installation room must be greater than
2550mm; operating room on the front is advised to be 1000mm; on the
sides leave room as detailed in Figure 5-5.

(Rev. 0)

5-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

Under floor conducts (Figure 5-4) must meet the following requirements:
C: suggested section: 20x10 cm / max distance between the pit and
the cabinet: 9 m.
D: suggested section: 10 cm / max distance between the cabinet and
the control panel 14 m.

*
,

NOTE:
If distances are larger than those indicated above (C and D) ask adequate
length of connecting cables at order.
WARNING:
The electrical cabinet is fitted with two wheels so that the rear can be
more easily accessed during installation and maintenance.

(*)

The minimum distance with cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo tilting area)
= 800 mm
The minimum distance with cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo tilting
area) = 600 mm

Figure 5-4: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation


without any limit on table movements
APOLLO

5-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

Figure 5-5: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation


with Chest Stand without any limit on table movements

(Rev. 0)

5-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

5.2

Electrical provisions
POWER SUPPLY

380/400Vac 3 phase +Ground

FREQUENCY

50/60Hz

ABSORBED POWER (table only)

5kVA

ABSORBED CURRENT (table only) 7A


APPARENT LINE RESISTANCE

*
,

< 1

NOTE:
Generally the power required for the fitting out of one complete X-ray
room including the Apollo table equals 25-30kVA.
WARNING:
The equipment can be connected directly to the mains or in cascade with
the ray generator, a preferable alternative because, when the generator is
powered down, the table and the accessories connected to it (e.g. the
image capturing system or chest stand) are turned off as well. In both
cases the wires of the three-phase power supply must have a crosssection of at least 4.0 mm.

Connection directly to the mains:


Make provision for an automatic switch with fuse as per the current
regulations in the country of installation.

Connection to the generator:


Check the generator manual to make sure that the connection points
are right for the load and insulation values.
The general grounding must respond to the standards in force. If the
grounding of the equipment is not good enough, it might jeopardise the
safety of the operator and/or cause the malfunctioning of the electronic
equipment.

APOLLO

5-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

5.3

Adaptation to the mains voltage


The insulation and power feed transformer (T1) of the Apollo table is
fitted with two sets of (R S T) primary winding power supply terminals.
One group is for connecting the 380V power supply, the other 400V.
The equipment can be supplied with provision for a 380V or 400V
connection. This pre-disposition must be specified on ordering and will
be incorporated in the factory before shipment.
Before powering up the equipment, make sure that the mains voltage
corresponds with the predisposition of the equipment by checking that:

the rating plate shows the right voltage (the position of the rating
plate is described in paragraph 3.1)

the primary main power supply insulation transformer T1 connection


corresponds with the mains voltage.

5.4

Environmental conditions
The data in paragraph 4.1 must be complied with for the environmental
operating and transport/storage conditions.

(Rev. 0)

5-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

5-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

INSTALLATION

WARNING:
During the mechanical installation of the equipment and the electrical
connection described below, the safety regulations in force must be
respected and the precautions described below must be taken:

wear accident prevention clothing (boots, gloves, goggles when


necessary)

always work in conditions of utmost safety and avoid carrying out


procedures that put you or others at risk

make sure that no electricity is supplied to the equipment unless the


installation is completed or said electricity is required for installation
purposes.

when the unit is ready to be powered up and while the installation is


in the final phases of completion, make sure the power supply is cut
off by means of a switch before accessing any of the parts that can be
a danger.
For delivery, handling and assembly purposes, the machine is broken
down into units that must be put together:

Base with beam and column (Assembly 1)

Tube and collimator support arm (Assembly 2)

Spot film device (Assembly 3)

Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm (Assembly 4)

Tabletop (Assembly 5)

Assemble the units by following the instructions below.

(Rev. 0)

6-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.1

Base positioning with beam and column


The base assembly with beam and column are shipped in a crate as
shown in Figure 6-1.

WARNING:
Before positioning the assembly on the anchorage plate, check that this
is flat with respect to both axes.
Do not use the grubs positioned on the left side of the basement to
achieve horizontal alignment of the table; these grubs may be used in the
final stages of installation to correct possible elastic deformations of the
basement when the table is loaded (see paragraph 6.5).
NOTE:
The operations described below require the use of a transpallet.
1. Remove lid "A" and walls "B" of the crate.
2. Remove the wooden beams "C" holding the pallets together, from the
pallet.
3. Remove bolts "D" and "E" holding the base assembly to the pallets.

D
E
C

D
B

Figure 6-1
APOLLO

6-2

(Rev. 1)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

4. Position the transpallet under one of the 2 side pallets "D", raise the
base assembly and remove the central pallet "E". Lower the
transpallet.
5. Referring to Figure 6-2, insert the transpallet centrally under the
base assembly and lift it to free the two side pallets "D". Rest one side
of the base on two supports (e.g. the pallets positioned on the corner)
leaving the centre part free; suspend the other side, inserting one of
the two main beams "C" parallel to the transpallet fork, allowing the
side of the base to protrude as much as possible.

Main beam
C

Figure 6-2
6. Referring to Figure 6-3, remove the transpallet and position it on the
side of the base assembly. Exert leverage on the shoulder and lift the
base assembly enough to remove the central pallet "C" and reposition
it under the base, in such a way that it is parallel to the long side of
the base and subsequently allows the transpallet to be inserted to lift
the group. Lower the transpallet.

Main beam
C

Figure 6-3
(Rev. 0)

6-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

7. Leaving the transpallet in its present position, slide it under the base
in such a way that it is possible to lift the assembly and free the two
supports. With the greatest of care, suspend the base assembly on
the central main beam "C"; slide the transpallet in completely under
the base.
8. Bring the base assembly into the room and follow the above
procedure in reverse, positioning the transpallet perpendicularly to
the base assembly. Take the base assembly to the fixing plate and try
to align the base-plate fixing holes as well as possible.
9. Position the two main wood beams "C" at the side of the base, parallel
to the transpallet forks. Lower the base assembly and remove the
transpallet.
10. Exerting leverage on one of the two side iron brackets, raise the base
assembly enough to remove one of the wooden beams. Gently lower
the base assembly until it is resting on the ground. Repeat the
operation to remove the remaining wooden beam.
11. Check that the holes in the base assembly line up perfectly with
those in the anchorage plate. If it is necessary, to move the base
assembly to align the fixing holes, use the transpallet.

NOTE:
Moving the base while it is resting on the ground by applying
leverage to the structure is not advised under any circumstances.
This operation could damage the actuators.

12. Fasten the base assembly to the anchoring plate and only then
remove the wooden main beam support structures and the side steel
brackets.

APOLLO

6-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.2

Assembly of the Tube support arm


1. Remove the front plate from the column stand.
2. Move the tube support arm towards the top of the column and, at the
same time, position the front plate in such a way that the nine fixing
holes on the parts to assemble (front plate tube support arm column section) are aligned (Figure 6-4).
3. Make sure that the tube support arm is aligned properly with the
column before tightening the fixing screws.
4. Position on the frontal part of the X-ray tube arm the microswitch for
0 position setting it in such a way that it is not activated when the
X-ray tube rotation pin reaches position 0.

Column
section
Tube
support arm
Front
plate
Micro 0

Figure 6-4

(Rev. 0)

6-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.3

Spot film device assembly


WARNING:
A plate is provided with the spot film device. This must be assembled
with the four spot film device support wheels and it will constitute a tool
necessary for the installation of the Image Intensifier (paragraph 6.6).
The spot film device is fitted on the relevant adjustable supports and
fitted with wheels to make it easier to move and position.
1. Position the spot film device assembly mounted on the transport
pallet, near the machine.
2. Free the four spot film device supports from the safety blocks fixing
them to the transport pallet.
3. Remove the spot film device from the pallet being careful to pay the
utmost attention not to damage it.
4. Remove all screws fixing the spot film device, the two safety rods
holding the inclination motor support on the end wall and remove the
protection of the inclination potmeter (Figure 6-5). Remove the two
top hooks from the spot film device (one per side) (Figure 6-6) so that
positioning can be carried out.

Safety
rod
Protection of the
inclination potmeter

Safety
rod

Figure 6-5

APOLLO

6-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

5. Position the spot film device assembly near the end wall and make
sure that it is possible to align the fixing holes on the shoulders and
on the inclination motor support. If it is necessary to lift or lower the
spot film device to align the fastening holes, use the adjustable
supports while being careful to avoid forcing the spot film device on
the angulation motor's fusion attachment (Figure 6-6).
6. Once the alignment of the holes on both the fixing shoulders has
been checked, it is possible to fix, without tightening, the spot film
device assembly with the twenty-two bolts supplied (eleven bolts per
side).
If the spot film device is imagined as a plane, it must be at right
angles to the end wall where it is fixed. Check that the two elements
are at right angles to each other using a bubble level. If it is
necessary to make an adjustment to obtain perfect right angles
between the spot film device and the end wall, adjust the adjustable
supports of the spot film device support until the position required is
reached (Figure 6-6).
7. Insert the two centering pins into their holes (Figure 6-6), one on
each side, taking care that the threaded part can be accessed from
outside, and then tighten the twenty-two fastening screws. Remount
the two top hooks removed at point "4" above.

Centering
pin

90

Top hook

Figure 6-6
8. Remove the four spot film device assembly adjustable supports.
(Rev. 0)

6-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

9. Carry out the spot film device wiring pre-arranged on the right-hand
side of the end wall.
The wiring must be routed using the relevant cable clips to be found
on the right-hand wall of the spot film device. The wires must be
routed in such a way that they are parallel to and not on top of each
other (Figure 6-7).
The X16 wire, fixed to an anchoring plate, must be placed on the
right-hand wall of the spot film device, interfacing with the flat cable
(X16) installed in the factory.
The following table is an aid in the identification of the cables and
where they must be connected (see also Figure 6-7).
Connector/Cable

Point of connection

X101

Spot film device PCB A10

X68

Spot film device PCB A10

X44

Spot film device PCB A10

X19

Spot film device PCB A10

X14

Spot film device PCB A10

X16

Interface connector X16

Ground cable Nr 8

A10 PCB fixing plate

A.E.C. chamber cable

A.E.C. chamber cable

X68
X14
X19 X44
X101

X16

Cable clip

Ground cable

Figure 6-7
APOLLO

6-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

NOTE:
The automatic exposimeter device is an optional and consequently the
A.E.C. chamber cable is only present when the automatic exposimeter
chamber is fitted to the spot film device.
1. Position the front panel of the spot film device and fix it with the
hinge on the left-hand wall.
Connect the free end of the flat cable (X16) to the PCB of the key pad
fitted on the machine A8.
Loosen the fixing screws of the hinge on the spot film device's lefthand wall; shut the panel and do up the bolts on both sides (Figure
6-8).

X16

Figure 6-8

(Rev. 0)

6-9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.4

Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly


The tabletop support arms are different from each other with regard to
the table fixing pin position and the reference lines for fixing the
respective belts. For this reason there are two labels indicating the lefthand and right-hand arms.

NOTE:
Both the table top support arms are fitted with blocking bolts for the
transport. Remove these blocks only after the arms have been assembled,
the relative belts have been tensioned and before mounting the tabletop
and moving the arms.
Right-hand arm assembly (Figure 6-9):
Remove the beam side protection used for transport purposes.
Remove the small plate from the beams.
Loosen the three external attachment fixing bolts.
Place the arm into its seat in such a way as to allow the assembly of
the belt on the relative pulleys, following the route indicated in the
figure. Check that the phasing reference lines marked above the belts
of the arm and the co-ordinator correspond; otherwise correct the
position of the belt of the arm.
5. Position the arm in such a way as to be able screw up the small plate
removed at point "2" using the three bolts. At this point the belt is
properly tensioned.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Belt aligment
reference

Arm belt

Coordination
belt
Outside support

Small plate

Beam side
protection

Figure 6-9

APOLLO

6-10

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6. Do up all the six arm blocking bolts.


7. Remove the blocking bolts used to immobilise the arm during
transport.
For the assembly of the left-hand arm proceed as for the assembly of the
right-hand arm.

(Rev. 0)

6-11

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.5

Machine cable connection


The machine is partially factory wired, while the rest of the wires are
provided separately; all have to be wired up to the machine as described
below.

NOTE:
The wire chains "A" and "B" (Figure 6-10) are made in such as way that
they can be opened to permit the wires to be inserted. Take care to note
when opening the chains the location of the individual covers. As these
are not all the same, they will have to be put back properly when the
chains are closed.
At this stage only the machine wires can be set up so as to permit
powering the table and to make the remaining installation process stage
easier, or the system wires can also be connected (high tension cables,
anode, etc.). How to proceed in this regard is a matter for the installer's
own discretion. When you decide also to connect the system wires it is
advisable to refer to paragraph 6.7 for tube-collimator group installation.
For neat wiring, it is better to position the chain wires as indicated in
Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10

APOLLO

6-12

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

1. House the group of cables leaving chain "A" in chain "B". Some of
these wires are much shorter than others. The shorter ones should
be connected to the A11 base connector board and the longer ones in
the table's electrical cabinet and that of the generator if you wish also
to connect up the system cables.
2. Before you start, chain "B" should be positioned as in Figure 6-11. It
is advisable at this stage not to close the wiring chain but just to
install some covers so as to secure the wires inside them. Connect
wires X20, X46, X75, X77, X88, X96, X97 and X98 to the A11 base
connector board (Figure 6-12), threading them through "C" (Figure
6-11). The base connector board has a dust guard that has to be
removed when connecting the wires and then replaced. Connect
ground cables 5, 7, 8, 9 and 11 (lift I.I. - optional) to the ground bar
(W2) in the base unit (Figure 6-13).

C
Figure 6-11

3. Connect ground cable 10 between the ground connection W2 on the


machine base unit and the ground rod (W1) in the cabinet.
4. Connect all the output cables in "C" and from chain "B" to the
machine cabinet: X68, X19, X14, X16, X44, X101, X73, E4, X71, E2,
X106 (lift I.I. optional), X70, E3, X20, X46, X99.5, X99.6, X74, E1,
X99.1, X99.2, X105 and X45 as indicated in the following table (see
also Figure 6-13).

(Rev. 0)

6-13

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

5. Connect the console cable (X8) to the cabinet; connect the foot
control (cable X41) to the console.
6. Connect the power cable to the R-S-T clamps on the insulation
transformer inside the cabinet. Connect the ground cable to the rod
(W1) in the cabinet.
7. Connect the system cables to the rest of the accessories when it is
decided wire them up during the procedures described above.

NOTE:
To avoid insurgence of an alarm condition at switch ON it is necessary to
install the collimator (see paragraph 6.7) and connect it by cable X45 or
simulate collimator presence; in this case it is possible for example to use
a male CANNON 37 pin connector with two voltage partitions built by a
resistor of 4.7k between pins X45-18 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7k
between pins X45-16 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7k between pins X4519 e X45-33 and a resistor of 4.7k between pins X45-17 and X45-33.
At this point the machine can be turned on and perform movements. In
this stage the mechanical alignment of the moving beams with respect to
the basement must be checked and possibly corrected. In order to do so
proceed as follows:
8. Move de equipment up/down and tilt it in both directions; if the
middle beam during same movements is in touch with parts of the
basements, proceed as by the following step, otherwise will be not
necessary other adjustments.
9. Release the two screws fixing the basement to the ground on the left
side of the basement, i.e. close to the regulation grubs.
10. Act on the regulation grubs to correct deformations of the side wall of
the basement: the process is of the trial and error type. Usually it is
advisable to screw in the grub on the opposite side where the
interference is present in the up-down movement of the beam.
11. Tight again the screws holding the basement to the ground.
12. Check again the movements following the procedure from step 8.
13. Make a few tilting movements to verify the correct situation and stop
the procedure.
This procedure should be repeated at the end of installation when the
table is loaded with all its accessories (II, X-ray tube, table top, ecc.)

APOLLO

6-14

(Rev. 1)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Location on the Table

Table side
cable code

Cabinet side
cable code

Location on the Cabinet

X34

Spot film device motor cable

X35

Spot film device motor cable

X36
Spot film device PCB A10

X68

Spot film device motor cable


Spot film device activation PCB A4

X37

Spot film device motor cable

X38

Spot film device motor cable

X39

Spot film device motor cable

Spot film device PCB A10

X19

X19

Input PCB A2

Spot film device


potmeter cable

Spot film device PCB A10

X14

X14

Input PCB A2

Spot film device cable

Button pad PCB A8

X16

X16

Input PCB A2

Button Pad Cable

Spot film device PCB A10

X44

X44

Cabinet connector PCB A12

Spot film device 24Vac


power supply

X0.10

Terminal block X0.10

X0.11

Terminal block X0.11

Spot film device PCB A10

(Rev. 0)

Description

X101

Emergency stop button cable

6-15

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Location on the Table

Table side
cable code

Cabinet side
cable code

Location on the Cabinet

Description

Base unit connector PCB A11

X20

X20

Input PCB A2

Machine potmeter cable

Base unit connector PCB A11

X46

X46

Cabinet connector PCB A12

PCB connection cable X46

X99.5

X0.1

Terminal block X0.1

X99.6

X0.2

Terminal block X0.2

X0.5

Terminal block X0.5

X0.6

Terminal block X0.6

Angulation connectors PCB A13

Angulation connector PCB A13

SID motor cable

X74

X99.1

X99.1

X99.2

X99.2

Angulation connector PCB A13

X105

Collimator

X45

Angulation connector PCB A13

APOLLO

Emergency micro switch


cable

Compressor PCB A15

Compressor motor cable

X105

Cabinet connector PCB A12

PCB connection cable

X45

Cabinet connector PCB A12

Collimator cable

6-16

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Location on the Table

Control panel - CPU PCB A14

Table side
cable code

Cabinet side
cable code

Location on the Cabinet

X8

Cabinet CPU PCB A1

X22

Input PCB A2

X0.7

Terminal block X0.7

X8

Control panel
X0.8

Terminal block X0.8

X0.9

Terminal block X0.9

X0.10

Terminal block X0.10

X106.1

X0.3

Terminal block X0.3

X106.2

X0.4

Terminal block X0.4

10

10

Cabinet ground rod (W1)

Ground cables 10

Beam motor

X70

Inverter box

Power supply cable


Main beam motor

Angulation motor

X71

Inverter box

Power supply cable


Angulation motor

Middle beam motor

X72

Inverter box

Power supply cable


Middle beam motor

I.I. lift (optional)

Base unit ground rod (W2)

(Rev. 0)

Description

Lift motor cable I.I.

6-17

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Location on the Table

Table side
cable code

Location on the Cabinet

Description

X73

Inverter box

Power supply cable


Scan motor

10

Cabinet ground rod (W1)

Ground cables 10

Angulation motor

E2

Terminal block X0.E2

Angulation motor
ground cable

Scan motor

E4

Terminal block X0.E4

Scan moto
ground cable

Main beam motor

E1

Terminal block X0.E1

Main beam motor


ground cable

Middle beam motor

E3

Terminal block X0.E3

Middle beam motor


ground cable

Scan motor
Base unit ground rod (W2)

APOLLO

Cabinet side
cable code

10

6-18

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

ANGULATION CONNECTOR CARD - A13


2

X89

2 1

2 1

X86

2 1

X91

X80

X79

X76

X74

V3

X82

2 1

X87

2 1

X85

2 1

X100

X105

X90

X97

V4
2

X94

X95

X98

X99

3
3
3

1 2

X83

1 2
1 2

X84

X88

2
2

V2

1
1

X81

X98

X97

X46

X93

X78

X92

V1

X77

X75

X20

X96

BASE UNIT CONNECTOR CARD - A11

Figure 6-12: Connector points diagram for machine connector board

(Rev. 0)

6-19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

X20

X19

X14

X16

7
X22
X12
1

X21

X17

X15

X13
X18

X10

X11

1
2

INPUT CARD - A2

X4

X12

X3A

X3B

A2

1
2

X4

X1

A4

X34
1
2

X2
X7
X3A

X9

CPU CARD - A1
X3B

X8
A1

S1

X5A

X5B

X5A

A3

X30 X107

R, S, T
CABINET
GROUND ROD (W1)

X5B
X27

X36
X39
X38
X37
X25

X23

X33

X6

X6

X35

SFD ACTIVATION CARD - A4

X70, X71,
X72, X73

OUTPUT CARD - A3

X17

X29

X26

X12

A12

X46

X15

5
9

X105

COMPRESSOR CARD - A15

X21

X25
X28

X31

X29

X24
1

X32

X26

X49

X47

X45

X48
1

CABINET CONNECTOR CARD - A12

10
(to the cabinet)

X44

10

N
N

S3
S3

E4
E3
E2
E1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

11

10
10

47
46
45
44
43
42
41

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48

BASE UNIT
GROUND ROD (W2)

X99

X0

TERMINAL BLOCK X0
X42 X41 X8

A15

X0.11 X0.10 X0.9 X0.8 X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1

Figure 6-13: Cable and ground connection points diagram

(Rev. 0)

6-21

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.6

Image intensifier installation

NOTE:
Assemble the I.I. trolley with the four Spot film device support wheels,
using the nuts supplied, in such a way as to get a trolley like the one
shown in the Figure, for the purposes of the I.I. installation.

Figure 6-14

(Rev. 0)

6-23

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.6.1

9-12 fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation


1. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the spot
film device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way
that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of
the machine.
2. Use the lift control to lower the table until the I.I.'s fastening holes
are aligned with those on the plates. You should proceed cautiously
at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore
advisable to lower the table in small steps.

Figure 6-15
3. Fasten the I.I. to the plates with the screws, and tighten.

APOLLO

6-24

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

4. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the spot film


device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is
necessary, slacken screws "A" (Figure 6-16) on both sides to get
sideways I.I movement relative to the spot film device, or screws "B"
(Figure 6-16) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position
has been obtained, tighten the screws.

B
Figure 6-16
5. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left
side of the end wall of the spot film device using the cable clip
provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so that they run
"parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the
machine.

Cable clip

Figure 6-17

(Rev. 0)

6-25

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.6.2

16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model)


1. Using the bolts supplied fix the two I.I. fixing plates as indicated in
Figure 6-18 taking into consideration the 530 mm distance between
the two guides. Any adjustments to this distance may be made with
the plate-guide fixing screws.
530

Figure 6-18
2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the spot
film device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way
that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of
the machine.
3. Use the lift control to lower the table so that the I.I. fixing plates run
inside the spot film device's walls and that the holes "A" (6 per side Figure 6-19) on the walls are aligned with the fastening holes on the
I.I. support guides. It is advisable to proceed cautiously at this stage
to prevent any damage to the I.I. occurring. It is therefore best to
lower the table by small steps.
4. Fasten the plates to the spot film device's shoulders by means of the
screws provided.
5. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the spot film
device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is
necessary, slacken the I.I. guide-plate support fastenings screws to
get sideways I.I movement relative to the spot film device or screws
"A" (6 per side - Figure 6-19) for longitudinal movements; once the
desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.

APOLLO

6-26

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Figure 6-19
6. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left
side of the end wall of the spot film device using the cable clip
provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so that they run
"parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the
machine.

Cable clip

Figure 6-20
(Rev. 0)

6-27

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.6.3

Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation

6.6.3.1

9 with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation


1. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.

Spacer

Anchorage
plate

Figure 6-21
2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the spot
film device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
3. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the spot film
device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line
with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-22). You should
proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the
I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw
the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the
screws provided.
4. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-22) between the
I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. this enables proper alignment of
the two plates.
5. Check longitudinal alignment between the spot film device and the
I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where there are those already present.
Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct
sideways alignment between the I.I. and the spot film device.

APOLLO

6-28

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Spacer
Figure 6-22
6. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the spot film device using the
cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.

(Rev. 0)

6-29

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.6.3.2

12 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation


1. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.

Spacer

Anchorage
plate

Figure 6-23
2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the spot
film device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
3. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the spot film
device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line
with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-24). You should
proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the
I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw
the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the
screws provided.
4. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-24) between the
I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. This enables proper alignment
of the two plates.
5. Check longitudinal alignment between the spot film device and the
I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where there are those already present.
Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct
sideways alignment between the I.I. and the spot film device.

APOLLO

6-30

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Spacer

Figure 6-24
6. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the spot film device using the
cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.

(Rev. 0)

6-31

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.6.3.3

16 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation


1. Fix the I.I.'s two anchoring brackets as indicated in the Figure.

Anchoring
brackets

Figure 6-25
2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14).Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the spot
film device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
3. Use the lift control to lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the
walls of the spot film device until the 4 fixing holes on the anchoring
brackets are in line with the corresponding four holes in the lift plate
(Figure 6-26). You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid
any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the
table in small steps. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate
without tightening using the screws provided.
4. Check longitudinal alignment between the spot film device and the
I.I. longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where the bracket fastening screws are
(Figure 6-26). Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures
correct sideways alignment between the I.I. and the spot film device.

APOLLO

6-32

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Spacer

Figure 6-26
5. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the spot film device using the
cable clip provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.

(Rev. 0)

6-33

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.7

Installation of the Tube - Collimator group

NOTE:
International regulations require that the total filtration of the X-ray
beam must be greater than 2.5mm Al.eq.
The Villa collimators have 0.5mm Al.eq. filtration; The Ralco collimators
have 1.0mm Al.eq. filtration;
Taking into consideration the filtration in the ray tube, as shown on its
technical plate, add the necessary filtration with the aluminium disks
provided with the tube or with the collimator kit; these disks can be
inserted into the ray output window.

NOTE:
The collimator kit consists of the following:
collimator fastening cone H=17mm
additional 0.5mmAl filters
collimator installation spacers of 1.5mm and of 3mm
6x25 and 6x30 fastening screws
1. Position the tube support in the corresponding fastening pin so as to
join together the two tube rotation release levers (Figure 6-27). Insert
the support screw onto the pin and tighten in the position that it is
best for the installation of the tube.
Fastening
pin

Support
screw

Release
levers

Tube
support

Figure 6-27

APOLLO

6-34

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

NOTE:
Point 2 only applies where the system is supplied with the Villa or the
Ralco collimator.
2. Position the tube on the support and at the same time apply the
collimator fastening cone (Figure 6-28). When doing this take due
account of the distance between the tube focus and the
cone/collimator plane; to ensure proper correspondence between the
field of the rays and the collimator light field, this distance must be
801mm. To do this the collimator kit's spacers have to be used (refer
to the technical data that comes with the X-ray tube to determine the
point of focus). Fix in position with the collimator's screws, taking
account of the fact that the choice of screw length is determined by
the number of spacers employed.

WARNING:
Incorrect choice of screw length may lead to inadequate fastening of the
X-ray tube group where short screws are used or possible damage to the
casing if the screws used are too long.
3. Install the collimator on the cone using the four fastening hooks and
connect it to the X45 cable.
The collimator cable length is calculated to permit machine servicing
even when the collimator is out of beam. With the group at 0
rotation, the corresponding micro safety switch inside the arm must
be in n.a. condition.

X-ray tube

Spacer
Collimator
fastening cone
Collimator
Figure 6-28

(Rev. 0)

6-35

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

4. Wire up the cables inside the arm (Figure 6-29).


The cables must be arranged so that the tube can rotate without
them getting damaged. The abundance required for that to be
permitted will be hidden inside the arm's top cover. Make sure the
micro safety switch's cable with the tube at 0 is anchored to the arm
so that it is independent from the rest of the cables. These must be
as far as possible free from clamps, with just the minimum
indispensable, to prevent damage on tube rotation. It is advisable
only to use the fastening points indicated for the machine.

Figure 6-29
5. Once the cabling inside the X-ray tube support arm and checked its
functionality, after having tested the rotation of the X-ray tube
proceed to mount the arm cover (Figure 6-30 4 screws preset on the
column stand + 8 screws on the arm). To complete this operation it is
necessary to power the SID and remove the chain and its right side
support (Figure 6-31) gaining access to the fixing screws on the
column stand.
6. Join the cover to the X-ray tube support by the two front half circles
(Figure 6-30).
Only at this point proceed to the cabling of the cables inside the
column.

APOLLO

6-36

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Figure 6-30
7. Open the chain, previously removed, and insert all cables coming
from the X-ray tube collimator group, making them run parallel.
8. Close and mount back the chain on its supports and then on the
column, having the cables coming out from the left side , on the back
of the chain (Figure 6-31).
9. Tighten the cables on the dedicated fixing point on the column,
following the routing of the cables already present; insert them in the
back chains.

Chain support

Figure 6-31
(Rev. 0)

6-37

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.8

Mounting the covers


When installation is complete, mount the covers, referring to Figure 6-32
and Figure 6-33.
Install the compressor arm with the cup.

APOLLO

6-38

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

*
(*) Cover supplied only where there is I.I. lift

Figure 6-32: Covers installation diagram (front view)

(Rev. 0)

6-39

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Figure 6-33: Covers installation diagram (rear view)

(Rev. 0)

6-41

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.9

Tabletop assembly
The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.
On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the
relative holes on the tabletop head mounts.
1. Remove the two iron beams at the extremities of the tabletop,
generally used to avoid possible plane deflections during transport.
2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight
washers.
3. Position the tabletop on the arms till the locking pins fit into the
relative holes (Figure 6-34).
If the distance between the table top and the spot film device is
minimal it is possible to increase it inserting the special spacers
supplied.
4. Screw on all the eight pins the relative nuts and washers; lock tight.

Nuts and washers


Pins

Figure 6-34

(Rev. 0)

6-43

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

6.10

Final verifications
Once the mechanical installation has been completed, it is necessary to
configure the Apollo table and check its functionality.
To do so proceed as follows:

APOLLO

Check that the beam movement does not interfere with the basement
and if necessary implement the corrective actions described in the
procedure at the end of paragraph 6.5, point from 8 to 13

Enter the room dimension data (see paragraph 11.1)

Enter configuration parameters (see paragraph 11.1)

Measure the current real speed of the movements (see paragraph


11.1); this operation is fundamental in case the power line is 60Hz

Check the functionality of all movements for the different functional


modalities (Spot film device, Tomography, Angiography, Digital) and
verify the anticollision safeties

After having completing the calibration of the X-ray tube, implement


centering procedures for X-ray tube Collimator - Serial Changer - II
(see chapter 19)

Check centering for the different cassette format (see chapter 19); if
necessary correct as needed.

6-44

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE


TABLE
The Apollo table has been designed with an electronic leading-edge
management and control circuit.
The circuit is based on PCBs called:

A1 CPU PCB

A2 "input" PCB

A3 "output" PCB

A4 spot film device motor "power driver" PCB

A14 "control panel" PCB

A15 "compressor motor command" PCB.


It is easy to deduce what the function of the PCBs listed above is from
their names and they are situated in the electrical cabinet with exception
of the control panel PCB.
Some information about the characteristics of the system's CPU that
could come in useful, is given below.
The "control panel" A14 PCB is fitted with a Motorola MC68332
processor and a 128K x8 Eprom.
The job of the program contained in this Eprom is to decode the state of
the joystick and the keys and send this information to the CPU on the
CAN BUS.
Moreover, its job is also to receive the status of the led and the graphic
and alphanumeric strings to show on the display, again from the CPU.
The A1"CPU" PCB is also equipped with a Motorola MC68332 processor
the job of which is to act as the main processor and a 512K x8 Eprom.
The incorporated program manages the entire functioning logic of the
equipment including, as said before, dialoguing with the control panel.
Also present are:

a flash eprom containing the alarm history and the machine cycle
times

an EEprom containing the equipment set up data and the positions


related to MODE 1-2-3 keys.

a Ram containing the date and time. Furthermore, the data regarding
the alarm history and the machine cycles are initially deposited in
the Ram and every ten minutes they are transferred to the flash
eprom.
There is also an AT89C2051 processor on the CPU that functions as a
Supervisor microprocessor with an internal eprom containing the
supervision and serial and parallel control program for the channels
responsible for the movements.
The release of the equipment management software contained in the
Eprom on the CPU is shown on the control panel display for three
seconds when the equipment is powered up.

(Rev. 2)

7-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

7.1

Functioning sequences

7.1.1

Powering up and initialisation sequence


On powering up the electronics of the CPU, the control panel, the input
PCB and part of the output PCB is powered through the T2 transformer.
At this point the main processor and the controller begin to perform the
checks that can make sure all the conditions are regular.
If that is the case, both the main processor and the controller activate the
respective "ready" relay after an interval of three seconds.
The open contacts of these two relays are connected in series.
One phase of the coil of the power remote switch K1L is interrupted by
the series of these two relays.
When they are activated, they therefore permit the energising of the K1L
that, through the closure of its contacts, will power the table's power
circuits.
At this point, the procedure for the initialisation of the spot film device
begins the purpose of which is to move the inside parts of the spot film
device to the default positions.
While this is happening, i.e. from the time the power circuits have been
powered up and when the organs of the spot film device have reached the
positions defined, all the movements of the table are disabled and the
control panel's display shows the flashing message.
"Initialisation. Please wait"
When the initialisation procedure is successfully completed, the control
panel display changes and shows the data for the active mode.
All the table movements and the functions will, at this point, be enabled.

APOLLO

7-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

7.1.2

Activation sequence for a movement


When a joystick, enabled to activate a movement is pressed, 2
microswitches are activated simultaneously.
The first sends the movement activation signal, along the CAN BUS line,
from the control panel to the main PCB.
The second opens the single fault circuit (SF) that is controlled either
from the main processor or the controller.
If all the conditions are in order, the processor will activate the circuits
that control the engines.
Once the feedback potmeter is launched it informs the processor about
the position and speed of the movement itself.
In order to indicate the working conditions, all the outputs are fitted with
a signalling led that lights up when an output, whether a movement
output or a controlling output for an external accessory, is active.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the below is useful
for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.

(Rev. 0)

7-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

BLOCK DIAGRAM
POWERING UP SEQUENCE

BLOCK DIAGRAM
SIMPLE MOVEMENT
Movement Joystick
activation
SF OK
YES
Send SF circuit
Hardware Opening
Data serial
SF OK
YES
Movement or
logic output
activation
SF OK
YES
HW power activation
SF OK

Table power up
Electronics power
supply
T2 ON

Check
electronics OK
YES

3 sec.
READY relay ON
K1L ON

Hardware electronics
check
OK
YES

End of message
"Initialisation"
SW table motor
movement enabling

NO

Signalling
ALARMS

NO

Turning off
READY relay

YES
Motor movement
SF OK
YES
Potmeter feed back
SF OK

NO

NO

NO

NO

READY relay
power down
Signalling
ALARMS
NO

NO

YES
Joystick release
output power down
Movement stop
SF reclosure SF OK

APOLLO

7-4

NO

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

7.2

Fault Conditions
Three different anomaly conditions can arise while the equipment is in
operation:

Condition fault

Operating fault

Power circuit faults.


These three different situations cause the consequences that are
analysed below.

7.2.1

Generation of a condition alarm


While the equipment is in operation a fault can occur in the table or one
of the accessories connected to it.
If this fault does not compromise the functioning of the system (Example:
the generator is not "ready" within the set time), a few movements are
disabled by the SW and the relative alarm flashes on the display of the
control panel accompanied by an intermittent "beep".
To remove the alarm and re-enable all the movements it will be necessary
to push the reset joystick downwards twice.
The first time silences the "beep", the second resets the alarm and
restores the normal conditions.

7.2.2

Generation of a operating alarm


If the processor recognises an abnormal situation caused by the SF
control or by other components interacting with the processor, that could
seriously compromise the functioning of the equipment, the READY
relays are deenergised and a flashing alarm appears on the control panel.
This condition cannot be reset as it is a serious fault.
A search must be made to see what the cause of this effect is.
To remove the alarm and re-enable the movements the equipment must
be turned off.

(Rev. 0)

7-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

7.2.3

Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit


If a movement of the table or the spot film device should for any reason
go over the SW run determined by the potmeter, an emergency end of run
will be intercepted.
This will entail the turning off of the power remote switch K1L with the
consequent opening of the power control input (X15 pin 10).
This will mean the main processor will turn off the READY relays and the
controller and generate flashing alarm 080 on the control panel display.
It will therefore be necessary to turn off the equipment to remove the
alarm situation.
After removing the cause of the failure, the powering up procedure after
the power cutting out must be followed in order to restore the normal
operating conditions described in the relevant chapter.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the one below is
useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.

APOLLO

7-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

CONDITION
ALARM

FUNCTIONAL
ALARM

Malfunction that is:


resettable
Flashing
alarm
on display
Joystick reset:
- 1st beep OFF
- 2nd beep alarm
OFF
Cause of
malfunction:
removed
YES
Restore
normal operating
conditions

(Rev. 0)

Malfunction that is:


- Single Fault
- Component

NO

Turning off
READY relay

POWER
ALARM

Malfunction that is:


Table emergency
Deenergising:
K1L
Input opening
X15 pin 10

Alarm
on display:
flashing
NON resettable

Alarm on display:
080 flashing

Turning off
equipment

Turning off
equipment

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

7-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

7-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
IN/OUT interface connection

IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION


All the input and output signals towards the accessories such as:
generator, TV chain etc. are connected to the input and output PCBs by
means of the X0 terminal clamp.
The hardware characteristics of these signals are listed below.

8.1

Output signals from the Apollo table


The outputs shown below are dependent on an open collector circuit
(ULN2803) NPN active at 0 V. No circuits with pull up resistances of over
30 Vdc with maximum current not exceeding 100 mA may be connected
to these outputs.
X0

Connector

Description

34

X27 pin 5

37

X27 pin 25

Request for fluoro

38

X27 pin 7

Exposure request

39

X27 pin 26

40

X27 pin 8

41

X27 pin 27

42

X27 pin 9

1st tomographic speed set

43

X27 pin 28

2nd tomographic speed set

44

X27 pin 10

7 tomography angle set

45

X27 pin 29

20 tomography angle set

46

X27 pin 11

30 tomography angle set

47

X27 pin 30

45 tomography angle set

48

X27 pin 12

Rays ON without request

49

X27 pin 31

Man/auto fluoro Kv selection

52

X27 pin 14

Angio steps

53

X27 pin 33

Motion detection

54

X27 pin 15

Recursive filter x0

55

X27 pin 34

Recursive filter x4

56

X27 pin 16

Recursive filter x8

Digital reconstruction

Preparation request
Digital preparation request
Request for second snap to be taken

The manual fluoro Kv control output is dependent on an analogical


circuit (TLC271) with a range of voltages from 1.8 Vdc to 6.5 Vdc. It is
possible to apply a maximum load of 5 mA.

(Rev. 2)

X0

Connector

59

X27 pin 19

Description
Man. Fluoro Kv control analogue

8-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
IN/OUT interface connection

The control outlets for the room monitor depend on an analogue circuit
(TLC274) with a resistance range from 0 to 4.7 K. It is possible apply
a max load of 3 W.
X0

Connector

Description

61

X28 pin 1

Mon. Brightness control analogue

62

X28 pin 2

Mon. Contrast control analogue

The following outputs are part of an optoisolator circuit (LH1520) that


must be polarised. The maximum voltage and current applied must not
exceed 25 Vac with 70 mA.

APOLLO

X0

Connector

Description

28

X27 pin 3

Common for im. Scan reverse circuit

26

X27 pin 4

Right/left image scan reverse

27

X27 pin 22

Up/Down image scan reverse

32

X27 pin 1

Common for Zoom I.I. circuit

31

X27 pin 20

30

X27 pin 2

29

X27 pin 21

Maximum Zoom (minimum field)


Medium zoom (medium field)
Minimum Zoom (maximum field)

8-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
IN/OUT interface connection

8.2

Input signals towards the Apollo table


The inputs below depend on an open collector circuit (74HC245) NPN
active at 0 V. This circuit formed with 24Vdc-referred pull-up resistors.
The typical absorption of these circuits is equal to 10 mA max.

(Rev. 2)

X0

Connector

Description

12

X13 pin 1

Generator ready for rays

13

X13 pin 2

X-ray on

14

X13 pin 3

Digital work station

15

X13 pin 4

Spot film device work station

16

X13 pin 5

Ceiling stand safety

17

X13 pin 6

External safety barrier

8-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
IN/OUT interface connection

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

8-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups

CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND


DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA GROUPS
All the data necessary for the configuration, operation and adjustment of
the Apollo table, including the Checksum that is updated every time the
data varies, are contained in the EEprom.
When powering up, the data are compared, the Checksum of the data is
verified again and it is compared with that currently in the EEprom. If
there is no correspondence between the two pieces of data the alarm 090
is generated.
The data contained on the EEprom are sub-divided into "groups".
There can be up to 99 position "cells" inside each of these groups.
A storage position will therefore be configured with three figures of which:

Number of the group

00

Position of the cell

To access the read only function of the data contained in these cells it
will be enough to position the switch of the group of dip-switches on the
CPU at ON.
In order to be able to edit, therefore write new data in the cells, as well as
activating the switches, it will be necessary to key in an access code.
In the table below the subdivisions of groups of data and their functions,
the dip-switches to activate and the access codes to be keyed-in are
listed.

WARNING:
The Authorised Technician is recommended not to communicate these
codes so that non-authorised persons are prevented from entering the
memory cells and changing them, thereby causing the equipment to
malfunction.
The version of the installed software in the Eprom on the CPU is shown
on the display for 3 seconds every time the machine is turned on:

Software rel. X.XX


DD MM YY
HH.MM
where:
Row 1 = version of the software also shown on the label on the

Eprom
Row 2 = date and time of the compilation of the operating files.

(Rev. 0)

9-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups

For any reporting of a malfunction or request for technical help, always


indicate the version of the software on the equipment.
The four access codes are :

C1 = 9006
C2 = 2573
C3 = 8425
C4 = 1541
The following table shows the dip switch combinations access code and
the functions of the various groups.
Dip switch

Code

Group

1
2
3
4
1+2

C1
C2
C1
C2
C1

101
201
301
711
401

1
1
2
2
3

C3
C2
C3
C4
C4

701
751
721
731
850

+
+
+
+
+

3
4
3
4
4

Subroutine
Potmeter adjustment
Installation data
PDI controlled motor setting data
time setting -Reset alarm memory
Equipment dimension setting
Run shutters and cassette
Eeprom copying
Alarm history visualisation
Spot film device and table life test
Remote service function
Equipment cycles and time display and resetting

The above mentioned groups are divided into positions.


The function of the various positions inside the groups is shown below.
Group

Position and function

Potmeter adjustment

From 101 to 133 setting of the maximum and


minimum of the various potmeters
From 201 to 262 typical settings linked to the
installation and the equipment
From 301 to 400 setting data for control of motors
with PDI function
711 = Time and date display
712 = Year setting
713 = Month setting
714 = Day setting
715 = Hour setting
716 = Minute setting
717 = Second setting
718 = Clock correction
719 = Reset alarm memory

Installation data
PDI controlled motor setting data
Time setting
Reset alarm memory

APOLLO

9-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups

Group

Position and function

Equipment dimension setting


Run shutters and cassette
Eeprom copying

From 401 to 686 dimensions and run setting

701 = Copy from EEprom to Ram


702 = Copy from Ram to EEprom
Alarm history visualisation
Extended diagnosis (from 1 to 20)
751 = Position and alarm data display
Spot film device part position and function display
753 = Joystick display
754 = Digital input display
755 = Digital output display
Reduced diagnosis (from 21 to 100)
800 = Alarm data display (2 alarms)
Spot film device and table life test 721 = Life test choice
722 = Spot film device life test
723 = Table life test
Remote service function
731 = Remote service function
Equipment cycle and time display 850 = Cycle and time display
and resetting
851 = Time display
852 = Time display
From 853 to 867 resetting cycles one field at a time

(Rev. 0)

9-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

9-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10

ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP


100 DATA
To access the data contained in group 100 the procedures described
below must be followed.

Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, turn switch 1 in the dip-switch assembly
in the CPU PCB to ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:

101
where:
101
(369)
-40.0
2090/
Angulation

(369)
-40.0
2090 / 4096
Angulation min (head side)
= number of the group and the position
= value presently in the memory
= position that the organ has to reach
corresponding to the value at minimum
= current value of the potmeters expressed on
a scale with a maximum value of 4096
= brief description of the function of the
selected cell.

The following will only be shown for the cells referring to the
adjustment of collimator movements (from 117 to 122 included ):

117
where:
117
(492)
1178 mm
000 mm
2090/
Collimator

(Rev. 0)

(492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090 / 4096


Collimator width min (closed)
=
=
=
=
=

number of the group and the position


value presently in the memory
current position of the SID
position to reach
current value of the potmeters expressed on
a scale with a maximum value of 4096
= brief description of the function of the
selected cell.

10-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

WARNING:
The SID value must be 980 mm during adjustment. If the value is
different when the MODE2 acceptance of storage to memory key is
pressed, the value is not accepted in the memory and alarm "088 Wrong
SID" will be shown on the display.
The value of the position to reach varies as the SID varies so the SID
value is only correct when it is 980 mm. This value is the dimension that
the ray field (and light field for the convenience of the measurement)
must have at tabletop level.
3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase
and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As
said beforehand, it is not possible in this phase to edit any
setting or perform any movement.

Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has
elapsed, the display will show:

002
0000
Key in access code
where:
002 = number of the position for the input of the access codes
0000 = position for the access code (see chapter 9).
2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message
CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.
3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means
of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in
accordance with the schematic below.

This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the


position for the inputting of the code.

APOLLO

10-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

4. Press key MODE2 to confirm.


If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the inputting
of the last digit, the flashing CORR message disappears, what is
written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data
remains in the memory.
However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time,
the display will show the message:

Access to groups 101 301 401


that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400,
thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in, in function
of which switches are positioned at ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on the
screen, instead:

Code incorrect: access denied


In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2.
5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second.
The display returns to the position of the group 100 abandoned on
entry to position 002.

(Rev. 0)

10-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1

Potmeter adjustment
As said before, the Apollo table bases the control of its movements on
the feedback generated by the potmeters.
These potmeters must therefore be adjusted, the reference value of the
maximum and end run voltages must, that is to say, be stored in the
corresponding cells in the EEprom.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this
group.
It will also be possible to perform the movements for the adjustment of
the potmeters by using the compressor movement joystick.
In this program, only this joystick will be active (with the exception of the
adjustment of the beam and middle beam movements and collimator as
described further on) and the motor that is activated will depend on the
cell that is set.
If the joystick is pushed upwards, the direction of the set movement will
be towards its maximum and the potmeter value shown on the display
will increase.
If the joystick is pushed downwards, the direction of the movement will
be the opposite, towards its minimum, and the potmeter value will
decrease.
In this program the speed of the PDI movements are set permanently in
the adjustment software and cannot be modified.
To carry out the adjustment, and therefore memorise the new potmeter
value, key MODE2 must be pressed.
The display will show the following for three seconds:

**** ACCEPTED ****


to confirm that the memorisation has been successful.
At the same time, the data in brackets at the side of the group number
and position is updated with the new value.

APOLLO

WARNING:
During the adjustment phase, the anticollision program is not active so,
before performing any movement, make sure that that there is not risk of
collision during it.
Furthermore, since the software end runs are set in this program no
stopping on them is activated.
If the set run is exceed, the movement will hit the emergency switch
causing the equipment to stop.

10-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.1

Cell data and list


The limits of the movements are set by default during the factory's
predelivery testing of the equipment.
These limits are shown on the display depending on the cell that is set.
It is possible to vary these limits by modifying the data in the cells of
group 400, but in practice this operation is never performed. In fact this
modifies the functional characteristics of the table.
Furthermore, in order to ensure maximum safety also in cases where
there is a malfunction in the movement electronics control, there are
hardware emergency switches positioned in such a way as to cut in when
the software end run does not stop the movement. These positions break
the power supply to the hardware circuits (they determine the opening of
the K1L remote switch). Thus any modification of the run limits also
entails the mechanical repositioning of these switches.
In the table below the functions of group 100 cells are shown.

Cell

Movement

101

Angulation

LOW

min

Anticlockwise (head end)

-40.0

102

Angulation

HIGH

max

Clockwise (feet side)

+40.0

103

Scan

LOW

min

Left (head end)

-800 mm

104

Scan

HIGH

max

Right (feet side)

+800 mm

105

Main beam

LOW

min

Withdrawal / decrease

135 mm

106

Main beam

HIGH

max

Extension/ increase

683 mm

107

Middle beam

LOW

min

Withdrawal / decrease

135 mm

108

Middle beam

HIGH

max

Extension/ increase

740 mm

111

Transversal
tabletop

LOW

min

Inside

-160 mm

112

Transversal
tabletop

HIGH

max

Outside

+160 mm

113

SID

LOW

min

LOW

1016 mm

114

SID

HIGH

max

HIGH

1516 mm

117

Collimator width

LOW

min

Closed

000 mm

118

Collimator width

HIGH

max

Open

490 mm

119

Height collim.

LOW

min

Closed

000 mm

120

Height collim.

HIGH

max

Open

490 mm

121

Optional
Iris collim.

LOW

min

Closed

102 mm

122

Optional
Iris collim.

HIGH

max

Open

600 mm

123

Compressor

LOW/HIGH

min

Descent/Rise

00.0 kg

124

Compressor

LOW/HIGH

max

Descent/Rise

15.5 kg

(Rev. 0)

Joyst.direct. Value Movement direction

10-5

Default.lim

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

Cell

Movement

Joyst.direct.

Value

125

Grid

LOW

min

Park direction

000 mm

126

Grid

HIGH

max

Field direction

560 mm

127

Cassette close

LOW

min

Closes

146 mm

128

Cassette close

HIGH

max

Opens

463 mm

129

Cross
subdivision

LOW

min

Left (head end)

-65.0 mm

130

Cross
subdivision

HIGH

max

Right (feet side)

+65.0 mm

131

Shutters

LOW

min

Towards opening

000.0 mm

132

Shutters

HIGH

max

Towards overlap (cross


subdiv.)

455.0 mm

133

Optional
I.I. lift

LOW/HIGH

Movement direction

min/ma Descent/Rise
x

Default.Lim

Switch high=ON
Switch low=ON

NOTE:
Position 133 does not refer to a potmeter but is used for the adjustment
of the switches of the end runs of the I.I. lift assembly when fitted. When
one switch is active on the display the ON value is shown, while the other
has the OFF value.
As said before, the default value that the movement must reach at the
minimum and maximum is shown on the display.
Once this position has been reached, the potmeter must indicate a near
value (a tolerance of up to 100 units can be reached) as shown in the
following table.
If not, release the potmeter, reach the position required with the
movement then turn the potmeter until reaching the indicated value.
Lock the potmeter in position and store the value to memory.
Compliance with this value makes it possible to ensure that the potmeter
is not damaged mechanically as a result of a position that leads to exceed
its mechanical stop, and the potmeter is used in the central area, thus
avoiding using the limits that often turn out to be critical.
As far as the position to reach to carry out the adjustments of the
minimum and maximum positions, it will be shown how to measure the
value to reach, on the next few pages by means of pictures and
descriptions.
In some cases, this measurement is different from what is shown on the
display, as shown in the last column of the proceeding table.
This is because the indicated value is the result of software calculations
having table points of origin as a reference but, in some case, it is
intricate and difficult to make these measurements in practice.
This is why points other than those shown in the figures have been
chosen to facilitate the calibration.

APOLLO

10-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

Cell

Movement

Value

101

Angulation

min

Anticlockwise (head end)

102

Angulation

max

Clockwise (feet side)

103

Scan

min

Left (head end)

approx.117

104

Scan

max

Right (feet side)

approx.3979

105

Main beam

min

Withdrawal / decrease

106

Main beam

max

Extension/ increase

107

Middle beam

min

Withdrawal / decrease

108

Middle beam

max

Extension/ increase

111

Transversal
tabletop

min

Inside

112

Transversal
tabletop

max

Outside

113

SID

min

LOW

approx.341

114

SID

max

HIGH

approx.3754

117

Collimator width

min

Closed

approx.790

118

Collimator width

max

Open

119

Height collim.

min

Closed

120

Height collim.

max

Open

121

Optional
Iris collim.

min

Closed

122

Optional
Iris collim.

max

Open

approx.3370

123

Compressor

min

Descent/Rise

approx.1880

124

Compressor

max

Descent/Rise

approx.3520

125

Grid

min

Park direction

approx.205

126

Grid

max

Field direction

approx.3710

127

Cassette close

min

Closes

approx.360

128

Cassette close

max

Opens

approx.3730

129

Cross subdivision

min

Left (head end)

approx.1430

130

Cross subdivision

max

Right (feet side)

approx.2640

131

Shutters

min

Towards opening

132

Shutters

max

Towards overlap (cross


subdiv.)

(Rev. 0)

Movement direction

10-7

Potmeter value
approx.334
approx.3762

approx.575
approx.3520
approx.380
approx.3715
approx.232
approx.3863

approx.3160
approx.880
approx.3050
approx.950

approx.330
approx.3740

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.2

ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 102)


To carry out this adjustment, it is necessary to remove the covers of the
scan group.
At this point, the spot film device support plate can be seen showing the
column tilting reference marks.
The limits of the angulation are obtained by bringing the upper edge of
the column to correspond to reference lines on the spot film device
support.
With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of
the soundness of the min and max positions reached.
Take the column towards the minimum (head side), select cell 101 and
store to memory.
Repeat the operation for the maximum (feet side) and memorise in cell
102.
-40

+40

Reference
marks

Figure 10-1: ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 102)

APOLLO

10-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.3

SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 104)


Before starting the adjustment of this movement, you must:
1. Move the table into a horizontal position with the lift higher than the
minimum position. This ensures that when the scan is moved over its
full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the
floor.
2. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group.
3. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be
found between the outer left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of
the spot film device base plate. The point to be reached is 52 mm.
Select cell 103 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the carriage to the maximum position (feet side) and find the
1652 mm measurement among the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in the cell 104.

1652mm

52mm

Figure 10-2: SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 104)

(Rev. 0)

10-9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.4

MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment


(cells 105 108)
When the main beam movement cells are select, as for all the other
adjustments, the movement is enabled by the compressor joystick.
Since just the main beam movement would make it impossible to reach
some positions, it is possible also to activate the middle beam movement
by means of the SID joystick.
The movements cannot take place at the same time, but the activation of
one excludes the other.
To carry out the minimum main beam and middle beam adjustment, it is
necessary to remove the II and, if a lift is present, bring the II attachment
plate to the high position.
Move the main beam in such a way that there is access to the verification
of the middle beam position. Move the middle beam downwards until it
ends up flat, while checking it with a bubble level (Figure 10-3); select
cell 107 and memorise the minimum middle beam value.

Bubble level

Figure 10-3: Minimum middle beam position (cell 107)

APOLLO

10-10

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

At this point bring the main beam downwards, in such a way as it ends
up flat, while checking with a bubble level (Figure 10-4).
Select cell 105 and memorise the minimum main beam value.

Bubble level

Figure 10-4: Minimum main beam position (cell 105)


At this point, take the main beam towards the maximum until it is
perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right
angles (Figure 10-5); select the cell 106 and store the maximum value to
memory.

Bubble level

Figure 10-5: Maximum main beam position (cell 106)


(Rev. 0)

10-11

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

WARNING:
In the main beam and middle beam adjustment phase, there are risks
that could damage the equipment very seriously.
In fact the combination of the main beam and middle beam movements
carried out incorrectly could cause a collision between the structure of
the main beam and the structure of the middle beam or a collision
between the main beam motor tube and the structure of the middle
beam. While in the first case the main beam-middle beam collision safety
switch protects the equipment, in the second a manoeuvring error would
cause irreparable damage to the main beam motor tube by bending it.
It is therefore fundamental, in addition to paying the utmost attention
before and during the activation of the movements, to follow the
instructions below to the letter.
At this point take the main beam towards the bottom until the extension
of the mechanical tube reaches 430 mm (Figure 10-6) to be measured
between the extreme limit of the actuator and the upper edge of the
outside tube of the actuator.

430mm

Figure 10-6

APOLLO

10-12

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

Select cell 108 and take the middle beam towards the maximum until it
is perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right
angles; at this point store the maximum value to memory.

Bubble level

Figure 10-7: Maximum middle beam position (cell 108)

(Rev. 0)

10-13

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.5

TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment


(cells 111 112)
Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be
measured between the aluminium tabletop support arm fixing block and
the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement tube.
The distance to be reached is 270 mm. Select the cell 111 and memorise
the minimum value.
Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the
590 mm measurement between the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value 112 in the cell.

270mm

590mm

Figure 10-8: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment


(cells 111 112)

APOLLO

10-14

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.6

SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment


(cells 113 114)
Remove the rear SID cover.
Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has
to be found between the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column
and the upper edge of the swinging column. The height to be reached is
42 mm. Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the
542 mm measurement between the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in cell 114.

42mm

542mm

Figure 10-9: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment


(cells 113 114)

(Rev. 0)

10-15

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.7

WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 118)


The WIDTH limitation of the collimator means the limitation
corresponding to the right and left of the patient.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm from table top surface
(dimensions shown on the display).
Select cell 117 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that
must be stored in position 118.

NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted" will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.

980mm

Focus

min = cell 117


max = cell 118

Figure 10-10: COLLIMATOR WIDTH potmeter adjustment


(cells 117 118)

APOLLO

10-16

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.8

HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment


(cells 119 120)
The HEIGHT limitation of the collimator means the limitation
corresponding to the head and feet of the patient.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm from table top surface
(dimensions shown on the display.
Select cell 119 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum,
that must be stored in position 120.

NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.

980mm

Focus

min = cell 119


max = cell 120

Figure 10-11: HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment


(cells 119 120)

(Rev. 0)

10-17

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.9

IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter


adjustment (cells 121 122)
Iris potmeters will only be adjusted if the table is fitted with collimator to
limit the square-rectangular and circular fields.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm from table top surface
(dimensions shown on the display).
Select cell 121 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that
must be stored in position 122.

NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.

980mm

Focus

min = cell 121


max = cell 122

Figure 10-12: IRIS COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment


(cells 121 122)

APOLLO

10-18

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment


(cells 123 124)
To perform this adjustment a compression dynamometer with a range of
0 to 20 kg is required.
Move the tabletop into the centred position and rest the dynamometer on
it.
The minimum must be adjusted with no force applied to the cone; store
the value in position 123.
Bring the cone down until a pressure of 15.5 kg as shown on the
dynamometer is exerted; store the value in position 124.

(Rev. 0)

10-19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 126)


Remove the upper cover of the spot film device.
Move the grid holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that
must be found between the grid centre and spot film device centre line
notch on the upper edge of the shoulders. The point to be reached is
460 mm.
Select cell 125 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the small frame to the maximum position (field) and find the
50 mm measurement among the same references used for the minimum.
Store the value in cell 126.

460mm
50mm

Grid centre
(park position)
Centre line notch
Grid centre
(field position)

Figure 10-13: GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 126)

APOLLO

10-20

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 128)


Remove the upper lid of the spot film device.
Select cell 127 and operate the compressor joystick until the cassette
close guides are fully closed and the gripping switch is not activated.
Store the value.
Select position 128 and widen the guides until the required
measurement indicated on the display is achieved.
Store the value.

(Rev. 0)

WARNING:
The adjustment of the cassette tightening guide potmeter must be carried
out with the scanning assembly for the cross subdivision perfectly
centred.
When the maximum is adjusted the greatest care must be taken to
ensure the guides do not violently strike the walls of the spot film device
but just brush them slightly.
Forcing the guides causes damage to the protection fuse F22 on the spot
film device PCB A4.

10-21

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment


The gripping switch's job is to ensure a certain contact between the
cassette and the driving belts.
This switch is ideally adjusted in order to get a pressure on the cassette
guides of approximately 6 kg.
Insert a cassette with height side 24 cm to make visible the reference
scale when the switch is activated.
To comply with this value, the scale on the cam must coincide with the
position 40 10 to be read from the graded scale on the volute.

Scala
graduata

Riferimento
di lettura

Figure 10-14: CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment


Perform the following to check the correct functioning of the gripping
system:
1. Move the table into a vertical position.
2. Insert a 35 x 43 cassette (35 height side direction) resting it on the
lower guide.

*
APOLLO

NOTE:
The cassette to use must be one of those the radiology room is equipped
with. This is because the check must be done under the worst operating
conditions (maximum weight in the lifting mode).
If the 35x43 size is not used, perform the test with the heaviest format
among those which are in use.
10-22

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

3. Operate the cassette insertion control.


If the adjustment is correct, the switch must never cut in while the
cassette is moving upwards until both the guides are touching the
cassette and an approximately 10 movement scale movement seen on
the graded scale has been performed.
If this is not the case, work on the switch activating cam to bring its
intervention forward or delay it.

(Rev. 0)

WARNING:
An adjustment that is not high enough (< 5 kg) causes the switch to cut
in early during the test described above.
An adjustment that is too high (> 7 kg) causes pressure that is to great
between the drive belts and cassette meaning the cassette has difficulty
moving.

10-23

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 130)


Insert a cassette between the guides with height side 24 cm on which
there is a centre line and grip it.
Select cell 129 and push the compressor joystick until the centre line of
the cassette is 65 mm away from the centre of the cassette resting
surface; store the value.
Select position 130 and repeat the operation in the opposite direction
with respect to the centre line; store the value.

Figure 10-15: CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 130)

APOLLO

10-24

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 132)


Remove the upper cover of the spot film device.
Take the shutters towards the minimum position (fully open) that
corresponds with an opening equal to 475 mm (Figure 10-16); select cell
131 and memorise the minimum value.

475mm

Figure 10-16: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 131)


Take the shutters towards the maximum position (overlapping) and read
the measurement of 9 mm (Figure 10-17); store the value in cell 132.

9mm

Figure 10-17: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 132)

(Rev. 0)

10-25

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

10-26

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11

ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL


GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)
To access the reading of the data contained in the various groups (except
for group 100) the following procedure must be followed.

Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, position the switch or switches of the
dip-switch group on the CPU PCB, relating to the data group for
which access is required, at ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:

XXX
YYYYYY
Description of the cell set
where:
XXX
YYYYYY

= number of the group and the position


= value currently in the memory.

3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase


and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As
said previously, it is not possible to modify any settings.

Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has
elapsed, the display will show:

002
0000
Key in access code
where:
002
0000

= number of the position for the input of the


access codes
= position for the access code (see chapter 9).

2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message
CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.

(Rev. 0)

11-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means
of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in
accordance with the schematic below.

This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the


position for the inputting of the code.
4. Press key MODE2 to confirm.
If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the
inputting of the last digit, the flashing CORR message
disappears, what is written disappears from the displays and the
non-edited data remains in the memory.
However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified
time, the display will show the message:

Access to groups XXX YYY - ZZZ


that indicates that it is possible to access groups, thanks to the
use of the code that has just been keyed in, to the relative groups
in function of which switches are positioned at ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on
the screen, instead:

Code incorrect: access denied


In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2.
5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second.
The display returns to the position of the group abandoned on
entry to position 002.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up
this group.
To modify the data, press the MODE2 key, the flashing message
CORR will appear on the display. By using the numeric keys key in
the data required and press the MODE2 key again within 15 sec. to
confirm the correction.

APOLLO

11-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.1

Group 200 Installation data


The values of this group is related to the installation of the equipment.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
To ensure the installation functions properly the correct values must be
input.

11.1.1

Function of the parameters of group 200


As the data contained in the cells of this group can be modified to render
the machine fit for the installation requirements, the default data set
during the table adjustment in the factory is shown in the second to last
column in the table. The last column is for the service technician to take
note any variations from the default data.

(Rev. 0)

11-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

Unit

Default

201

Left wall - table center distance

The distance between the left wall and the table centre must be included
in this data. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop
measured when flat.

mm

-3000

202

Right wall table center distance

The distance between the right wall and the table centre must be
included in this data. The table centre corresponds with the centre of the
tabletop measured when flat.

mm

3000

203

Floor - ceiling distance

Measure the distance between the floor and the ceiling bearing in mind
the lowest point in the movement of the X-ray tube.

mm

3000

204

Floor-tube safety distance

The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from
the floor that the X-ray tube can reach.

mm

200

205

Ceiling safety distance

The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from
the ceiling that each component of the table can reach.

mm

200

206

Walls safety distance

The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distanced
from the left and right walls that each element of the table can reach.

mm

200

207

II-floor safety distance

This data determines the minimum distance that the II will be able to
reach from the floor.

mm

100

208

The ascend band II-floor collision

The ascent band is ideally positioned over the value stored in cell 207.
During tilting, when one side of the II enters this band, the movement is
modified with respect to the way it operates normally to ensure the II gets
out of the ascent band preventing it from reaching the safety zone (cell
207) by causing the machine to stop.

mm

60

209

I.I. vertical dimension

The size measured between the upper surface of the II (input screen zone)
and the more distant lower part (TV camera coverage zone or angulation
motor cover in case of 9 I.I.)

mm

600

210

I.I. bottom half size

The value to be stored must be that which corresponds to half of the


measurement of the lower part of the II (typically the measurement of the
television camera radius must be input).

mm

250

(Rev. 0)

11-5

Setting

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

Unit

Default

211

Tube equivalent radius at 0

The half width of the hood value must be stored to memory. Remember
however that since the rear end of the tube holding arm is 340 mm from
the tube attachment shaft, the minimum data that can be put in is 340
mm.

mm

340

212

Casing/collimator eq. radius if not at The height to key into this cell must be that which was measured
0
between the tube attachment shaft and the furthest point from the tubecollimator assembly. Typically the point corresponds with the collimator
sharp edge furthest from the shaft.

mm

350

213

Focus - tube shaft distance

Input the vertical distance between the focus position and the tube fixing
pin.

mm

214

I.I. minimum field

Include the nominal measurement of the minimum II field (maximum


enlargement).

mm

158

215

I.I. medium field

Include the nominal measurement of the medium II field (medium


enlargement).

mm

250

216

I.I. max field

Insert the rated value of the I.I. rated field in the case of a three-field
intensifier. If a four-field II is installed the field value must be input
with minimum enlargement.

mm

312

217

I.I. max field for 4 fields

This data is only used by the software when cell 252 is set at 1 (four-field
II). In this case insert the value of the nominal II field.

mm

410

218

Width-height collimator format


correct

This data makes it possible to modify the opening of the collimator in the
radiography collimations. It has no influence on the opening of the
minimum, of the maximum and on the II formats.

mm

219

Cassette exposure position correction If it is necessary to modify the exposure positioning runs of cassettes of
the same number, the correction value required must be input into this
cell.

mm

220

0 MAX position distance by grid

mm

50

APOLLO

This data makes it possible to centre the grid on the rays perfectly. The
data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter maximum
and the 0 grid position.

11-6

Setting

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

Unit

Default

221

Park MIN distance by grid

This data makes it possible to position the grid properly in the park. The
data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter minimum
and the grid parking position.

mm

10

222

Total grid oscillation length

Since the grid performs an oscillation during the exposure, the value in
this cell makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation.
Since the grid oscillates symmetrically around point 0, the total
oscillation has a value that is equal to double the half run calculated
from the 0 point.

mm

20

223

Exposure delay after grid start

This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid with
X-rays exposure. The data depends on the generator characteristics and
it is advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between
X-ray request and the response.

sec.

0.00

224

Transversal tabletop dead band

The dead band is the "the window" around the set point, that once
reached turns off the movement. The smaller this value is, the more
precise the positioning with relation to the end runs (min, max and
centering) but the risk of movement oscillations increases around the set
point when the stop is requested. A compromise value must be inserted
between these two effects to optimise the movement of the transversal
tabletop.

mm

225

SID dead band

See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement
at the min and the max.

mm

226

Compression force dead band

See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be input in this cell will be activated for the set point of the
compression force, set by means of the control panel keys, when applied
to the patient.

kg

0.5

(Rev. 0)

11-7

Setting

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

Unit

Default

227

Grid dead band

See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid movement at
the min, max, 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation.

mm

228

Gripping dead band

See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be inserted in this cell will be active for the cassette guide
movement only at the maximum opening. This data must be input with
maximum care because too small a value will determine a collision
between the guides and the walls of the spot film device risking a
breakage of the motor protection fuse while too great a value will make
the loading of the 43 size cassette difficult.

mm

229

Width collimator dead band

See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to insert in this cell shall be active for the movement of the
base axis of the collimator for all the automatic collimation positions on
cassette sizes, on II sizes and at the min and the max.

mm

230

Collimator height dead band

The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the height collimation
axis.

mm

231

Iris collimator dead band

The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the iris collimation
axis.

mm

232

Width collimator slow down band

The slow down band is positioned around the dead band of collimator
width axis. This data determines the change of movement speed of the
movement in the axis before the dead band is reached. Thanks to this
slowing down (implemented by a hardware circuit) it will be possible to
set very small dead bands (thereby enhancing position precision) thereby
avoiding oscillations caused by speed of high positions. The data to be
inserted in this cell is therefore intimately bound to the data of the dead
band.

mm

10

APOLLO

11-8

Setting

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

Unit

Default

233

Height collimator slow down band

The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232).

mm

10

234

Iris collimator slow down band

The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232).

mm

10

235

Transversal tabletop average speed

Since the transversal tabletop is not controlled by PDI logic but by an


on/off movement with potmeter feedback only for position monitoring,
the logic is not able to correct the speed. It will therefore be possible for
the logic to monitor an excessive position error caused by a mechanical
defect (movement /potmeter coupling etc.). To recognise such an error
however the logic must know the average speed of the tabletop movement
in all its conditions. The average value of this speed must be inserted in
this cell after having calculated it as described in cell 262.

mm/s

54

236

SID average speed

What is described for cell 235 applies.

mm/s

25

237

SID height after tomo

This value sets the SID position automatically readed when the
Tomography function is completed.

cm

100

238

Angio table lift default position

If the table is used for stepping angiograph tests, the data inserted in this
cell determines the height of the tabletop for m the ground when the
stepping angio mode entrance procedure is finished.

mm

1100

239

II diam percentage per angio step

The length of the step in angio step mode depends on the II field selected.
However to get a slight overlap between one step and the next, that helps
in the reconstruction of the contrast liquid passage, it is necessary for
the length of the step is lightly shorter with regard to the II diameter. The
length of the step can be reduced in percentage terms through the data
that is placed in this cell.

90

(Rev. 0)

11-9

Setting

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

246

0=disab 1=filters 2=puls 3=zone

Dependent on the TV chain installed on the table and the requirements of


the operators, it is possible to configure the dedicated key function and
the relative outputs. There are four functions:
-

247

APOLLO

Unit

Default

Setting

0 = disabled function
1= filter display (CCDx0 CCDx2 CCDx4 CCDx8). Activation of the
three relative outputs.
2 = mode display (pulsed continuous). Activation of the output
corresponding to CCDx0 when pulsed is displayed
3 = ROI display (large small). Activation of the output corresponding
to CCDx0 when "large" is displayed.

0=Ita 1=Eng 2=Fran 3=Espa 4=Deut Depending on the country where the system is installed, it is possible to
choose what language the messages will be displayed in. This applies to
all the messages that are displayed during the regular operation of the
equipment. With regard to the display of the service programs (functions
that can be accessed through the dip-switches) there are two languages:
Italian with selection = 0, English for all the other selections.

11-10

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

The cells in group 200 after those already listed are used to make the
setting choices and not introduce numerical data like the previous ones.
In these fields a choice is requested between values 0 or 1 to establish
the setting choice.
Do the following to modify the input data:
1. Press the MODE2 key to enable the correction. The display will show
the flashing message CORR.
2. Press key F3. The data present is automatically replaced with the
alternative.
After this operation, the writing CORR disappears and the data is
confirmed in EEprom.

(Rev. 0)

11-11

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-12

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

250

0 = no 1 = yes
Collimator hold mode default

This setting determines whether when the equipment is turned on or


each time the "automatic collimator" mode is selected, the Hold function
is active by default or whether it must be activated by the operator by
pushing the relative key.

251

0=foot-head 1=head-foot
Cross subdivision sequence

This determines the succession of radiograms for the cross subdivisions.

0=

1=

Default

252

0=3 fields 1=4


II fields I.I. field selection

The data depends on the II installed. Typically the 4 field selection is for
16 II.

253

0 = no 1 = yes
Iris collimator

This depends on the configuration of the table configuration that can


make provision for a collimator with square/rectangular filed or
square/rectangular field with iris.

254

0 = no 1 = yes
Anticrushing safety device

The table is designed to allow the implementation of a safety device to


prevent the trapping of parts between the spot film device and tabletop
support arms, between tabletop profiles and spot film device bottom and
between column and spot film device sides. If this circuit is installed it
will be necessary to activate the relative input software control using this
setting.

255

0=pres. 1=abs.
I.I. lift

As an option, the table can be fitted with an II lift device to bring it


towards the tabletop in digital fluoroscopic mode (dependent on the
setting of cell 256). When this option is present the value must be 0.

(Rev. 2)

11-13

Setting

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

256

0 = no 1 = yes
I.I. lift go up in fluoro

If the I.I. lift option is present (cell 255) the II is always brought towards
the table when the digital mode is selected. The value to be keyed in this
cell determines whether the approach also occurs when the fluoro is
requested. The mode enhances the quality of the image but delays the
fluoro-exposure passage time.

257

0 = cm 1 = inch
Cassette type

The selection depends on the cassettes that are available.

258

0 = right side 1 = left side


Table vertical position

Depending on the room where the table is installed, the "vertical position"
can be on the right or left side. The angulation motor will be mounted on
the left side when the vertical position will be on the right side and viceversa. Selecting 0 (vertical on the right Trendelenbourg on the left) the
display will show positive angles when tilting to the right and the
scanning will have a limitation of 300mm, left side, when tilting is
between 5 and 80.
Selecting 1, the above will be reversed.
The setting of this parameter must always be consistent with the
angulation motor. If this setting is not consistent the motor will hit the
floor during tilting with the scanning close to its range limit.

259

0=off-off 1=off-on
Horizontal image scan reverse

Dependent on the type of TV chain installed, it might be necessary to


activate the horizontal image scan reverse output by default. Selection 0
determines that when the table is turned on both the dedicated key led
and the relative output are Off. By pressing the key the led is turned on
and the output is activated.
When the table is on, selection 1 determines the automatic activation of
the output with the led of the relative key off. When the horizontal image
scan reverse key is pressed the led comes on and the output is turned off.

APOLLO

Default

11-14

Setting

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

260

0=off-off 1=off-on
Vertical image scan reverse

What was described for cell 259 is valid here applied to the vertical image
scan reverse function.

261

0=enable 1=disable
Spot film device disabling

It disables the spot film device controls. The initialisation functions and
all the relative modes are no longer performed. This override is present
when the table is in theall digital version.
This can be activated if the spot film device breaks down to exclude
alarms and any disabling.

262

0=normal 1=Technical service function In standard operating mode this function must always be deactivated.
The activation determines the display of the message "SERVICE
FUNCTION ACTIVE" and enables the following procedures that can be
used for service and control operations.
-

Default

Setting

Display of the instant speeds


By activating the movement of the tabletop or the SID the speed is
visualised thanks to the potmeter feedback. The speed in all load
conditions and position of the equipment must be checked, the
various values noted and the average obtained. The values that can
be obtained in this way must be inserted in cell 235 for transversal
tabletop and 236 for the SID. The measurement of the speeds only
must to be done if the movement potmeters have already been
adjusted. Otherwise the value shown is not real.

Exclusion of the collimator limitation and the spot film device


shutters
The collimator and the spot film device shutters do not perform the
limitation on the II or cassette size thereby permitting any checks and
measurements to be made on the spot film device or the exposed
films.

(Rev. 0)

11-15

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

Display

Function description

263

0=high high 1=high -low

It reverses the image on the monitor high-low when the function monitor
orienting is selected.

264

0=right-right 1=right left

It reverses the image on the monitor right-left high-low when the function
monitor orienting is selected.

APOLLO

Default

11-16

Setting

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.2

Group 300 PDI controlled motor data


This group contains the values linked to the operation of the motors
controlled using the PDI (proportional, derived, integral) method.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
This data is essential for the proper functioning of the equipment.
Before varying any data of this program whatsoever it is important to
understand its meaning, its function and the possible consequences,
thoroughly.
The brief explanation given below is useful to better understand the
function of the various cells present for each of the motors controlled
using this system.

11.2.1

Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control


To move an axis, the control software must know:

the departure point of the movement

the point of arrival.


The departure point is known because it corresponds with the position in
which the axis is.
The arrival point is determined by the choice made when a movement is
selected.
To reach the arrival point it is therefore necessary to describe a
trajectory.
This trajectory will be created thanks to the data inserted in the cells
containing the speed and acceleration values.
To perform the movement it will therefore be necessary for the software to
carry out two separate functions:

the generation of the trajectory

following the trajectory.

Generation of the trajectory


The software constructs a variable that represents the point where
the movement should be moment by moment.
This variable is called the theoretical trajectory.
Having the departure point as the origin, the generation of the
theoretical trajectory consists of:

a ramp, i.e. a stretch of acceleration that rises steadily linearly

a stretch of constant speed

a deceleration ramp with acceleration equal to the acceleration


ramp but with a negative sign.
The speed and acceleration values used for the generation of the
theoretical trajectory are those inserted in the relative cells.

(Rev. 0)

11-17

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Following the trajectory


The following of the theoretical trajectory constructs a variable that
generates the real trajectory.
This variable will then be translated into the reference signal (Vref),
sent to the activation that controls the axis motor.
This signal will be modulated in such a way as to approximate the
theoretical trajectory as closely as possible.
This variable is the sum of three components:

Proportional
The proportional part is product of the multiplication:

"instantaneous error" X "proportional gain"


where:

the instantaneous error is given by the difference between


the real position (monitored by the feed back of the potmeter
or encoder) and that theoretical (calculated by the generation
of the trajectory)

the proportional gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.

Integral
The integral part is product of the multiplication:

"sum of the errors" X "integral gain"


where:

the sum of the errors is obtained by the sampling conducted


every millisecond that calculates the positioning error
between the real trajectory and the theoretical one.
The error can take a negative and positive value according to
whether the real trajectory is before or after the theoretical
one.
The sum of all these errors sampled will be algebraic, that is
to say, it will take the error's negative or positive sign into
account.
The sum of the errors will therefore be a number that is
accumulated during the accomplishment of the whole
trajectory.

the integral gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.

APOLLO

11-18

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Derivative
The derivative part is the product of the multiplication:

"error difference between 2 samplings" X "derivative gain"


where:

the error difference between samplings, is calculated on


the basis of an interval time that must be set in the dedicated
cell.
This interval expressed in msec. is called "derivative sampling
period".
The position error, i.e. the difference between the real and the
theoretical trajectories, is calculated at each sampling.
The difference between the error detected in a sampling and
the error detected in the next sampling shows the extent to
which the actual trajectory has changed its position with
respect to the theoretical one.

the derivative gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.


So far the following fields have been analysed:

Proportional gain

Integral gain

Period of derivative sampling

Derivative gain
Here below is a brief analysis of the remaining fields responsible for the
control of a PDI axis.

(Rev. 0)

Integration limit
This is the maximum value that the sum of the integral action errors
can assume.
If the sum of the errors exceeds the value set in this cell, it will be
limited in accordance with the limit set.
If the data set in this cell is 0 no limitation will be performed.
This parameter avoids action that is too extreme in the case that the
sum assumes values that are considerable.

Motor STOP error


When the difference between the actual and the theoretical position
of a movement reaches a value that is equal to the one set in the cell,
the movement will be stopped.

11-19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

APOLLO

Delay motor turning off


This delay is the time after which, at the end of the run, the motor is
turned off.
This time allows to make up for a possible real positioning error as
opposed to a theoretical one.
This allows the integral action to complete its function.
By inserting the value 0 the movement is never stopped.

Braking time
This value permits to ramp down the motion independently of the
acceleration ramp. The time inserted into these cells is equal to the
time the motion employs to pass from the actual speed to 0 in a
linear way. This occurs regardlessly of the real position with respect
to the theoretical one. In this case, the integral position recovery
actions are not carried out and the motor turning off delay does not
have effect. This braking modality is used for the following
movements: main beam, middle beam, scan and angulation.

11-20

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.2.2

Motors check data function


The following tables, divided by motor, contain the data relative to the
various PDI-controlled motors.

Angulation movement
Cell

Function

Default

301
302
303
304
305
306
307
309
310
311
314

Period derivative sampl.


Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit ()
1st (/sec) joystick and tomo speed
2nd (/sec) tomo speed
1st (/sec) joystick and tomo acceleration
2nd (/sec) tomo acceleration
Error stop motor ()
Braking time (sec)

Set

0.001
200
0
200
20
11.1
23.0
25.0
50.0
5
0.5

Scan movement
Cell

Function

317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
332

Period derivative sampl.


Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (mm)
Joystick initial speed (mm/sec)
Joystick final speed (mm/sec)
Angio step speed (mm/sec)
Angio return speed (mm/sec)
Joystick acceleration and angio return (mm/sec2)
Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2)
Joystick speed increment (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Braking time (sec)

(Rev. 0)

Default

11-21

Set

0.001
600
0
800
20
5
150
300
300
250
300
30
100
0.5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Main beam and middle beam movement (tilting and lift)


Cell

Function

Default

335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
349

Period derivative sampl.


Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit
Low tilting speed (/sec)
High tilting speed (/sec)
Lift manual speed (mm/sec)
Slow tilting speed acceleration (/sec2)
High tilting speed acceleration (/sec2)
Lift acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Braking time (sec)

Set

0.001
600
10
400
10
4.5
6.0
25
4.0
6.0
70
80
0.4

Shutters movement
Cell

Function

Default

353
354
355
356
357
358
360
361
362
363
364

Period derivative sampl.


Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (mm)
Initialisation speed (mm/sec)
Work speed (mm/sec)
Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Delay turning off motor (sec)

0.001
2000
50
3000
50.0
100.0
300.0
100.0
1200.0
100
0.50

APOLLO

11-22

Set

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cassette movement
Cell

Function

365
366
367
368
369
370

Period derivative sampl.


Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (mm)
Access speed (until cassette size photosens.)
(mm/sec)
IN-OUT speed (mm/sec)
Work speed (mm/sec)
Access and IN-OUT speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Delay turning off motor (sec)

371
372
373
374
375
376

Default

Set

0.001
2000
50
4000
50.0
400.0
400.0
950.0
300.0
12000
200
0.10

Cross subdivision movement


Cell

Function

Default

389
390
391
392
393
395
396
397
398
399
400

Period derivative sampl.


Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit
Initialisation speed (mm/sec)
Work speed (mm/sec)
Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Delay turning off motor (sec)

0.001
1100
50
2500
10.0
30.0
90.0
12.0
2000.0
25.0
0.50

(Rev. 0)

11-23

Set

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3

Group 400 / 500 / 600 Dimensions and runs


This group contains data that have various functions.
The function of the various cells is listed in the following tables divided
by groups.

11.3.1

Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter


feedback
As explained in the chapter about potmeters adjustment, the limit to
reach for the calibration is shown on the display.
This limit is set in this block of data.
To vary the value of the set default data means to adjust the movement
run range.
This will entail:

the variation of the equipment specification

the adjustment of the potmeter minimum and maximum calibration

the adjustment of the emergency switches position.


Moreover, it will be necessary to check if the movement mechanics can
sustain such variation.
The software will divide the new run range by the number of potmeter's
points that are going to be sampled between the minimum and maximum
value of the new run.

APOLLO

WARNING:
Do not modify the data in this group as they are linked to the operative
characteristic of the equipment.

11-24

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

View

Function description

Unit

Default

401

Angulation: minimum position

Software minimum end of run position for angulation movement

-40.0

402

Angulation: maximum position

Software maximum end of run position for angulation movement

40.0

403

Scan: minimum position

Software minimum scan position for angulation movement

mm

-800

404

Scan: maximum position

Software maximum scan position for angulation movement

mm

800

405

Main beam: minimum position

Software minimum main beam position for angulation movement

mm

135

407

Middle beam: minimum position

Software minimum end of run position for middle beam movement

mm

135

409

Maximum Trendelembourg position

The main beam and middle beam potmeters adjustment determines the
minimum Trendelembourg position equal to 90. It might be necessary
to modify such limit for increase the comfort for the patient. Thanks to
the value to input in this cell, it is possible to determine the movement
arrest at 88, -89 or at 90. On the console display, during normal
operating conditions, the value 90 will always be shown regardless of
the set value.

-88

410

Maximum vertical position

It holds the same as for cell 409 with the difference that this value has an
influence on the vertical position with positive tilting angles.

88

411

Transv. tabletop: minimum position

Software minimum end of run position for tabletop movement

mm

-160

412

Transv. tabletop: maximum position

Software maximum end of run position for tabletop movement

mm

160

413

Tube shaft - film dist.: minimum pos. Software minimum end of run position for SID movement

mm

1016

414

Tube shaft - film dist.: max position

mm

1516

(Rev. 2)

Software maximum end of run position for SID movement

11-25

Setting

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

View

415

Minimum main beam forced setting

416

417
418
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432

APOLLO

Function description

Unit

In this cell is it is possible to force-set the minimum value of the main


beam movement potmeter. This avoids removing the I.I. to perform the
calibration. To correctly perform this calibration procedure, it will be
necessary to calculate the data to input by checking the difference
between the previously stored minimum and maximum values and the
value corresponding to the maximum of the new calibration. The same
previous difference between the two values shall be applied.
Example: previous Mx = 3600 min = 500 difference = 3100
New max value = 3450 new val to input = 350 obtained applying the
3100 difference to the new max value.
Maximum main beam forced setting
In this cell is it is possible to set manually the maximum value of the
main beam movement potmeter, in the case that it is not possible to
reach the normal maximum position due to limitations of the room.
Calibration is similar to what described in cell 415.
Minimum middle beam forced setting It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 415)
Impostazione forzata massimoculla
It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 416)
Compression force: minimum
Software minimum end of run position for compression force
Compression force: maximum
Software maximum end of run position for compression force
Grid: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for grid movement
Grid: maximum position
Software minimum end of run position for grid movement
Gripping: minimum size
Software minimum end of run position for gripping movement
Gripping: maximum size
Software maximum end of run position for gripping movement
Cross subdivision: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for cross subdivision movement
Cross subdivision: maximum
Software maximum end of run position for cross subdivision movement
position
Shutters: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for shutters movement
Shutters: maximum position
Software maximum end of run position for shutters movement

11-26

Default

Setting

(XXX)

(XXX)

kg
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

(XXX)
(XXX)
01.5
15.5
000
510
146
463
-65.0
65.0

mm
mm

0.0
495.0

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3.2

Equipment mechanical dimensions


This block of data contains some mechanical dimensions characteristic of
this equipment.
The software uses these dimensions to perform calculations of the
various functions' management algorithms (anti-collision, tomography,
lifting and tilting functions, etc.).

(Rev. 0)

WARNING:
These data are closely linked to the equipment and therefore should
never be modified in order to avoid modifications to the equipment
functioning.

11-27

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-28

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

View

Function description

Unit

Default

433

Dist. tube shaft-angulation shaft


(SID=1000)

It refers to the distance between the mount shaft of the right tube and
the rotation pin of the column. This data must be input with the SID on
the minimum. It is used to calculate the collision.

mm

1016

434

Distance vert. main beam shaft I.I.


sensor

It is the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin
and the input I.I. sensor. The value is used to calculate the collision.

mm

83

435

Distance main beam shaft - main


beam left side distance

It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam
left limit. The value is used to calculate the collision.

mm

500

436

Distance main beam shaft - main


beam right side distance

It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam
right limit. The value is used to calculate the collision.

mm

1920

437

Dist. vert. main beam shaft - upper


main beam

It refers to the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing
pin and the main beam upper limit.

mm

206

438

Distance tabletop film

It is the distance between the tabletop and the film. The data is used to
calculate the layer in the tomo modality.

mm

64

439

Distance main beam shaft angulation shaft

It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the column
rotation pin. The value is used to calculate the collision.

mm

64

441

Dist. I.I.-film (lift.up)

This value is used only in the presence of the I.I. lift and it is the distance
between the film and the I.I. sensor when the lift is in the upper position.
The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan
run for inclined projections and for the tomography.

mm

-19
(see
NOTE)

442

Dist. I.I.-film (fixed or lift.down)

This value is used both in the presence of the I.I. lift and for fixed I.I.
equipment and it represents the distance between the film and the I.I.
sensor. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the
scan run for inclined projections and tomography.

mm

18
(see
NOTE)

443

Distance film - shutters

It is the distance between the film and the shutters inside the spot film
device. The value is used to correctly perform the collimation.

mm

12

NOTE:

(Rev. 0)

Setting

These values will need to be modified in accordance with the dimension and the type of installed I.I.. The correct value will ensure the
correspondence between the set layer and the real one in the Digital tomo modality and for the inclined projections.

11-29

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

View

Function description

Unit

444

Distance park - cass. size photosens.

The present value corresponds to the distance between the parking and
the cassette size photosensor. It is used to correctly position the cassette
in the parking position.

mm

445

Distance vert. middle beam shaft floor

It is the distance on the vertical axis between the middle beam mount
shaft and the floor. The value is used to calculate the collision.

mm

605

446

Distance between the middle beam


shafts

It is the distance between the base-middle beam and main beam-middle


beam mount shafts.
The value is used to calculate the collision.

mm

1420

APOLLO

11-30

Default

Setting

472

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3.3

Data relative to single fault potmeter controls


This block of data is used to check the potmeters and the functions
linked to single faults.
A detailed description of the functions is reported in each cell.

(Rev. 0)

11-31

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-32

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Cell

View

Function description

Unit

Default

447

Max error for transversal tabletop

The value in cell 235 represents the average speed for the transversal
tabletop movement (see paragraph 11.1.1). As the real speed will never be
identical to the stored speed, during the movement, an error will indicate
the discrepancy between the real and the theoretical position. This error
will be reset once the movement is stopped. If the error takes on a value
equal to the one stored in this cell, alarm 218 is issued.

mm

200

448

Max error for SID

It holds the same as for the transversal tabletop movement.


With respect to the SID movement, the average speed is stored in cell 236
and in case the error value is reached, alarm 220 will be displayed.

mm

200

449

Max error for stopped potmeters

n/4096
The processor checks that the movements' potmeters do not undergo
variations if the same movements are not active. This is done in order to
guarantee the Single Fault safety.
The number to store in this cell must take into account possible
movements caused by the momentum of inertia after the movement
arrest.
The measurement unit is expressed in "potmeter points", in other words,
a value corresponding to the unit after the AD conversion.
The greater this value the wider the movement carried out with request
prior to the processor displaying the alarm. For potentially "dangerous"
movements potmeters, a cell is available for each movement (see following
cells).
In this cell the collimator, spot film device and compressor movements
potmeters are checked.

(Rev. 0)

11-33

Setting

300

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell

View

450

Extra-run max pot. out of SW range

451

452

453
454
455
456
457

Function description

This cell's value refers to the extra-runs that the potmeter can carry out
n/4096
in proximity of the software range without generating an alarm.
This extra run can be caused, for instance, by dead bands.
If the potmeter exceeds, during the extra run, the value set in this cell, an
alarm will be generated indicating the excessive proximity of the potmeter
to the limits.
All this permits to detect if the potmeter circuit is interrupted when
powering on.
Max time of joyst. not corresp. - S.F. It is present the data relative to the check of correspondence of the
sec
activation and single faults circuits.
The time value set in this cell, with measuring unit expressed in sec., is
equal to the window inside which a single fault alarm is generated (231 or
232) in case there is no correspondence between the activation and single
fault circuits.
Max error for stopped angulation pot. It holds the same as for cell 449 applied to the angulation movement. The

value is expressed in degrees and it is the maximum involuntary


movement allowed without generating an alarm.
Max error for stopped scan pot.
See cell 452 applied to the scan movement.
mm
Max error for
pot.
Max error for
pot.
Max error for
tabletop pot.
Max error for

Default

5.00

1.0

15

See cell 452 applied to the main beam movement.

mm

15

stopped middle beam

See cell 452 applied to the middle beam movement.

mm

15

stopped transversal

See cell 452 applied to the transversal tabletop movement.

mm

15

pot. SID stopped

See cell 452 applied to the SID movement.

mm

15

The value to be stored in this cell determines the displacement that the
cross subdivision movement will perform toward the head side with
respect to the central position.
It holds the same as for cell 459 as to the displacement towards the feet
side.

mm

-60.0

mm

60.0

Cross subdivision displacement


(head side)

460

Cross subdivision displacement (feet


side)

11-34

Setting

50

stopped main beam

459

APOLLO

Unit

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3.4

Spot film device cassette and shutters run


This block contains the runs carried out by the spot film device cassette
and shutters to perform the various cassettes subdivisions and the
relative limitation.
In case the separating lines of the X-rays of some subdivisions are not
perfect, it is possible to modify these values, by following closely the
instructions reported in the dedicated chapter.

NOTE:
The cassette and shutters positioning might not correspond to the
measure in the relative cell because of the mechanical inertia of the
system.
In every way the correction in mm introduced in the cells has an
increment and decrement effect in the final amount equal to the value of
the correction.
For rapid consultation and interpretation, the runs and the relative cells
are summed up in tables where the first number indicates the cell
number and the second, in brackets, the stored data in mm.

(Rev. 0)

11-35

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run


The calculation is based on the distance of cassette internal side, when
the same is in the parking position, with respect to centre of the spot film
device. Such distance is divided into 2 parts:

the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the centre of the
spot film device (227 mm)

the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the internal side of
the spot film device (484 mm)
The 484 mm figure is such as the distance of the photosensor from the
bottom of the spot film device (cell 444) is 472 mm but the cassette
parking position is set by the SW at:
5 mm from the bottom at the end of cassette insertion
20 mm from the bottom when caming back from a preparation or test
run

NOTE:
Distances given in the tables an stored in the cells are referred to a
parking position of the cassette at 20 mm from the bottom of the spot
film device. The correction, when the parking position is at 5mm from the
bottom, is carried out automatically by the software which increases the
distances in the table of 15mm.
Note that it is possible to store a new negative or positive offset value (cell
219) to compensate the differences due to manufacturing or operating
characteristics. This offset will permit to modify all runs of all
subdivisions of the stored quantity.
The formulas applied to determine the runs are as follows:

Full size
C = (cassette width / 2) 711
where 711 = 227 + 484

Subdivision 2 in line and 4 cross


C = full size run +/- (film / 4)

APOLLO

Subdivision 3 in line and 6 cross


C = full size run +/- (film / 3)

Subdivision 4 in line
C = full size run +/- (3/8 film) and (1/8 film)

11-36

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Table cassette run for cassettes in cm


13x18 18x13 18x24 24x18 24x24 24x30 30x24 30x30 18x43 43x18 15x40 40x15 20x40 40x20 30x35 35x30 30x40 40x30 35x35 35x43 43x35
PAN

SUBDIV. 2 L

461

462

463

466

466

469

472

478

463

512

531

532

518

521

478

500

484

490

500

506

512

(600.8)

(576.0)

(576.0)

(547.0)

(547.0)

(547.0)

(516.5)

(516.5)

(575.0)

(450.7)

(590.5)

(466.5)

(565.0)

(467.0)

(516.5)

(489.3)

(517.0)

(467.0)

(489.0)

(489.3)

(451.3)

464

467

467

470

473

479

513

533

519

522

479

501

485

491

501

507

513

(531.0)

(486.5)

(486.5)

(490.0)

(442.0)

(441.5)

(343.5)

(367.0)

(517.5)

(367.0)

(441.5)

(400.0)

(442.5)

(367.5)

(400.0)

(400.0)

(342.5)

465

468

468

471

474

480

514

534

520

523

480

502

486

492

502

508

514

(620.0)

(606.0)

(606.0)

(607.5)

(592.0)

(591.5)

(557.5)

(567.0)

(617.5)

(567.0)

(591.5)

(577.0)

(592.0)

(565.5)

(577.0)

(577.0)

(557.0)

SUBDIV. 3 L

475

481

515

535

524

481

503

487

493

503

509

515

(415.0)

(416.5)

(307.7)

(335.0)

(335.0)

(416.5)

(370.5)

(417.7)

(334.3)

(370.5)

(370.5)

(308.0)

476

482

516

536

525

482

504

488

494

504

510

516

(516.0)

(516.5)

(450.5)

(466.5)

(466.5)

(516.5)

(487.5)

(517.0)

(467.0)

(487.5)

(487.5)

(451.5)

477

483

517

537

526

483

505

489

495

505

511

517

(616.0)

(616.3)

(592.0)

(599.0)

(599.0)

(616.3)

(606.3)

(615.5)

(599.0)

(606.3)

(606.3)

(593.8)

SUBDIV. 4 L

SUBDIV. 4 L

464

467

473

(530.0)

(486.5)

(442.0)

465

468

474

(622.0)

(606.0)

(592.0)

464

467

473

(530.0)

(486.5)

(442.0)

465

468

474

(620.0)

(606.0)

(592.0)

538

527

496

(317.0)

(317.0)

(316.6)

539

528

497

(417.3)

(417.0)

(417.3)

540

529

498

(516.0)

(516.0)

(515.0)

541

530

499

(614.5)

(614.5)

(617.2)

475
(415.0)

476
(516.0)

477
SUBDIV. 6 L

(616.0)

475
(415.0)

476
(516.0)

477
(616.0)

(Rev. 0)

11-37

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Table cassette run for cassettes in inches


5x7
FULL SIZE

SUBDIV. 2 L

7x5

8x10

10x8

9.5x9.5

10x12

12x10

17x7

11x14

14x11

14x14

14x17

17x14

571

572

573

576

588

579

582

628

629

594

600

610

616

622

(602.0)

(577.0)

(563.5)

(540.8)

(546.0)

(538.8)

(514.0)

(577.0)

(449.0)

(524.5)

(486.0)

(488.0)

(488.0)

(449.5)

574

577

589

580

583

630

595

601

611

617

623

(513.6)

(476.8)

(485.5)

(576.7)

(438.3)

(342.0)

(456.3)

(397.5)

(399.2)

(399.3)

(341.5)

575

578

590

581

584

631

596

602

612

618

624

(613.0)

(601.5)

(606.0)

(601.0)

(589.0)

(556.0)

(596.3)

(575.5)

(578.0)

(578.0)

(557.4)

SUBDIV. 3 L

591

585

632

597

603

613

619

625

(466.5)

(414.5)

(306.4)

(432.0)

(371.0)

(369.5)

(369.5)

(306.4)

592

586

633

598

604

614

620

626

(546.6)

(514.5)

(449.5)

(524.5)

(486.0)

(488.0)

(488.0)

(449.4)

593

587

634

599

605

615

621

627

(626.0)

(613.5)

(591.5)

(617.0)

(603.5)

(606.0)

(606.0)

(592.4)

SUBDIV. 4 L

SUBDIV. 4 L

7x17

574

583

(512.0)

(436.3)

575

584

(613.0)

(587.0)

574

583

(511.0)

(435.0)

575

584

(612.0)

(587.3)

635

606

(288.0)

(353.0)

636

607

(396.0)

(440.5)

637

608

(503.3)

(529.5)

638

609

(609.5)

(618.3)

585
(412.5)

586
(512.5)

587

SUBDIV. 6 L

(611.5)

585
(411.2)

586
(510.7)

(Rev. 0)

11-39

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run


The calculation is based on the typical measures of the spot film device
reported below:

distance film-upper shutter = 17.0 mm

distance film-lower shutter = 10.5 mm

mean distance film-shutters = 13.75 mm (cell 443)

minimum source to film distance = 1000 mm

maximum source to film distance = 1500 mm.


The origin position for the calculation of all runs is the one relative to the
calibration of the shutters minimum potmeter, i.e. when the shutters are
wide open.
As to line subdivisions, this position is equal to a 475 mm opening,
therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm the shutters will have to
move of 475/2 mm.
As to cross subdivisions, the window opening start will require a run
equal to (475/2)+180=417.5 mm., where 180 mm is the width of the
small shutter.
Therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm for cross subdivisions, the
shutters will have to move of 417.5 mm.
In the calculation of the formats to limit, the values KG (radiography
correction), calculated with min SID (1000 mm), will be used.
This allows to obtain a separation line between 2 adjacent radiograms
with min SID and a thicker line with higher SIDs.
Should a KG be used, calculated with SID greater than the min, the
obtained separation lines would be too thin or radiograms would overlap
in case of SIDs smaller that the one used for the KG calculation.

Calculation of the constant of exposure subdivisions


correction (KG)
KG = distance source-shutters / source to film distance
KG = 985.8/1000 = 0.9858

Calculation shutters opening in Full size


Format to limit in full size mode = (Film + 2) * KG
where:
2 = measure in mm in addition to the format to ensure the X-rays
cover the film completely

Calculation of the opening for Subdivision


Format subdivision = ([(Film - (2 * N.div)] / N.div) * KG

Dimension of the shutter run for subdivisions in line


Run = (426 / 2) - (Fsubdiv / 2)

Dimension of the shutter run for cross subdivisions


Run = 393 + (Fsubdiv / 2)

(Rev. 0)

11-41

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions cm.


DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH
13

15

18

20

24

30

35

40

43

FULL

542

565

543

563

546

548

557

553

560

SIZE

(131.2)

(153.0)

(183.5)

(200.0)

(240.0)

(301.0)

(353.8)

(401.0)

(431.0)

SUBDIV.
2L

544

564

547

549

558

554

561

(87.0)

(96.0)

(117.0)

(148.5)

(172.5)

(194.2)

(210.0)

SUBDIV.
3L

551

559

555

562

(99.0)

(114.8)

(127.8)

(139.0)

SUBDIV.
4L

556
(96.1)

SUBDIV.
4L

545

566

550

(86.0)

(118.0)

(147.5)

SUBDIV.
6L

552
(97.0)

Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions inches


DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH
5

9.5

10

11

12

14

17

FULL

639

660

640

650

643

653

645

656

661

SIZE

(132.2)

(182.4)

(205.0)

(243.0)

(256.0)

(280.0)

(308.0)

(360.0)

(431.0)

SUBDIV.
2L

641

651

644

654

646

657

662

(98.0)

(115.5)

(124.2)

(136.2)

(149.0)

(176.8)

(210.0)

SUBDIV.
3L

652

655

648

658

663

(78.0)

(89.4)

(99.3)

(115.0)

(139.0)

SUBDIV.
4L
SUBDIV.
4L

642

647

(100.0)

(149.0)

SUBDIV.
6L

APOLLO

659

664

(85.6)

(103.5)

649
(100.0)

11-42

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.3.5

Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements


In case the PDI value generated by the software and sent to the motors'
activations differs from the feedback speed supplied by the potmeters or
by the encoders, the system must be able to recognise this effect and
therefore bring the equipment to a halt.
This inconvenient may be caused by a mechanical hardening or by a gear
slippage at the potmeter.
For each of the PDI-controlled movements, 2 values determine the
variance amount between PDI and speed, and the time beyond which this
variance triggers an alarm:

Variance time
It is expressed in seconds and it allows to mask possible spikes of the
value of the PDI value determined by friction or typical momentum of
inertia at the start.
In case a real problem occurs, the larger is this time, the longer will
be the movement before an alarm is issued.

K factor
This factor divides the PDI (PDI/k) value.
The software compares the value of the speed with the PDI/k value.
Being k the denominator of the fraction, the greater will be k, the
smaller will be the result of the fraction.
As the alarm is issued if PDI/k > speed, the smaller is the PDI/k
value the more a mechanically "rigid" movement will be accepted
without issuing any alarm.
By and large, the greater are the time values and k, which are set for
each movement, the more the movement will accept "hardenings",
allowing a non-controlled wide movement before issuing an alarm.

Angulation movement
Cell

Function

671

PID subdivision factor

672

Diagnosis delay

Unit

Default

Setting

8000
sec

1.0

Unit

Default

Scan movement
Cell

Function

673

PID subdivision factor

674

Diagnosis delay

(Rev. 0)

Setting

8000
sec

11-43

1.0

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Tilting-lifting movement
Cell

Function

675

PID subdivision factor

676

Diagnosis delay

Unit

Default

Setting

8000
sec

1.0

Unit

Default

Shutters movement
Cell

Function

679

PID subdivision factor

680

Diagnosis delay

Setting

10000
sec

1.0

Unit

Default

Cassette feeding movement


Cell

Function

681

PID subdivision factor

682

Diagnosis delay

Setting

10000
sec

1.0

Unit

Default

Cross subdivision movement


Cell

Function

685

PID subdivision factor

686

Diagnosis delay

APOLLO

Setting

10000
sec

11-44

1.0

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.4

Position 701 EEprom copy


This program permits to make a copy from EEprom.
This component stores all data necessary to the functioning of the
equipment.
At every start these data are loaded in the RAM.
If for safety reasons, you need to copy these data on a spare backup
EEprom, please follow the procedure below:
1. Power off the equipment and position dip switches 1 and 3 on ON.
2. Power on the equipment.
The following will be displayed:

701 EEPROM RAM


copy Press correction, then F3
To access the EEprom copy program, carry out the procedure of access to
the various groups as described above.
3. When the access to the copy program is enabled following the correct
procedures, press button MODE2 as displayed, then F3.
The data copy from EEprom to RAM will start.
The following message is displayed:

701 EEPROM RAM


copy Transferring data
After a few seconds, if the process has been completed successfully
and no alarms are issued, the following message is displayed:

701 EEPROM RAM


copy Transfer completed. Turn off
4. At this point, power off the equipment, replace the EEprom with an
identical component on which you might want to store all functional
data of the equipment.
5. Power the table back on. The following message is displayed:

702 RAM EEPROM


copy Press correction, then F3
Carry out the same operations as for the EEprom RAM copy.
The data will be stored on the new EEprom.
The equipment can now be used with a spare EEprom that contains all
functional data.

(Rev. 0)

11-45

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.5

Position 711 Clock settings and reset alarm


memory
Cells from 711 to 719 are used to set the date and time stored in the
RAM.
Date and time are used as they will be associated to the alarms that
might be issued. For a correct interpretation of the alarms memory, it is
imperative that date and time are correct.
Besides, it is also possible to reset the "alarms log" in the Flash Eprom.
Once access to edit position 711 has been achieved (see chapter 11) the
display shows:

711

22 - 10 - 2004
07 : 02 : 44

Scrolling the pages by keys "MODE3" and "TEST" the positions will be
displayed:

712
713
714
715
716
717
718

Year setting
Month setting
Day setting
Hour setting
Minutes setting
Seconds setting
Clock adjustment

04
10
22
07
02
44
+0.0

Position 718 permits to adjust the clock in case it runs too fast or too
slow due to Quarz variations.
The last position of this group is the following:

719 F3 = reset Reset alarm memory


By pressing function key F3, the alarm memory stored in the Flash
eprom will be reset.
This resetting operation can be useful after the equipment maintenance.

APOLLO

11-46

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.6

Position 721 Test spot film device and table life


The Apollo table is set to perform cyclic movement tests.
These tests are useful when checking the movements for correct
functioning under stress conditions.
It is possible to perform tests for the spot film device or table movements.
After performing the access procedure, the following message will be
displayed:

721 SPOT FILM DEVICE test


1

TABLE test
2

By keying in the access code relative to this position, it will be possible to


select the type of test to be performed by typing 1 for the spot film device
test or 2 for the table test.

(Rev. 0)

11-47

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.6.1

Spot film device test


The spot film device perform the initialisation procedure after which the
following message is displayed:

Load cassette 30x24


By loading the cassette correctly, the cyclic test begins and the following
message is displayed:

Test spot film device life


722
Num.cycles: 00000000 Num.exp.: 00000000
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are
carried out:
Cassette position

Shutters and collimator position

Park

4th field I.I. (cell 217)

Program: 30 Full size

Full size 43

Park

Max I.I. (cell 216)

Program: 30/2

30/2

Park

Medium I.I. (cell 215)

Program: 30 Full size

Full size 43

Park

Min I.I. (cell 214)

Program: 30/3

30/3
4th

Park

field I.I. (cell 217)

Program: 30 Full size

Full size 43

Park

Max I.I. (cell 216)

Program: 40/4 (line)

40/4 (line)

Park

Medium I.I. (cell 215)

Program: 30 Full size

Full size 43

Park

Min I.I. (cell 214)

Program: 30/4 (cross)

30/4 (cross)

In the Full size modality, the shutters position themselves on size 43


rather than on size 30 to carry out the maximum possible run.
Program 40/4 in line is carried out with cassette 30 as the program 4 in
line for cassette 30 is not available.
Every time the cassette is put in the parking position, the following
outputs are enabled:

fluoro request

CCD output in rotation

I.I. field output in rotation.

APOLLO

11-48

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

Every time the cassette is directed towards the exposure position:

the prep., digital prep, II step, exposure outputs are enabled

the grid oscillates for 1 sec.

WARNING:
As outputs for the system accessories get enabled, before starting the
spot film device test, make sure that the accessories linked to the Apollo
table are not power-supplied.
At the end of each program the cassette is ejected, the cassette guides
are open and closed again until they grip the cassette.
At the end of a complete cycle (as described in the table), before resuming
with what described up until now, the following occurs:

the grid movement as far as the parking position and return to field

all outputs are turned on

all console LEDs flash up

the collimator lamp lights up for 5 secs.

On the display the number of exposures increases each time the cassette
position itself in the X-ray field, so is the number of cycles every time a
complete cycle is performed.
A complete cycle consists of 17 cassette positions.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to
enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numeric keypad.

(Rev. 0)

11-49

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.6.2

Table test
The table will cyclically perform movements that allow to check the
correct functioning of the various organs.

WARNING:
As the movements are activated automatically without opening the SF
circuit, during this test, the supervisor is disabled. Therefore its K3 ready
relay does not close. In order to perform the test, make a jumper on the
connector X47 between pins 6 and 7.
Remove the jumper at the end of the test.

WARNING:
The test is conceived in such a way to limit the movements in case
collisions occur. Nonetheless pay always attention during automatic
movements performed by this program. Particularly during the first
cycle, stay close to the emergency red button and be ready to activate it if
any risk condition occurs.
The following message is displayed:

Table life test


723
Number cycles: 00000000
Before starting the proper test cycle, the table goes into the default
position with the following settings:

Minimum SID

Tabletop in the middle

0 angulation

scan in the middle

Compressor in parking position

0 tilting

Minimum lift depending on the installed I.I..


Should in this phase a collision condition occur, the cycle is interrupted
and the following message is displayed:

Cycle interrupted due to collision


The equipment needs to be powered off, the life test interrupted and the
table positioned in a way such that no condition of collision occurs when
the default position is in the process of being reached.

APOLLO

11-50

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are


carried out:

SID ascent with concurrent compressor descent. When the limit is


reached, the movements invert the direction until they bring
themselves back with minimum SID and compressor in the parking
position

angulation towards the head, inversion until feet end of run and
return to 0

scan movement towards head concurrent with table inward


movement. When the limit is reached, the movements invert their
direction until they reach the scan feet side and external table end of
run. Return of both movements to the centre

tilting towards Trendelembourg, movement inversion till reaching the


vertical end of run, then return to 0.
At the end of the tilting movement, the number of cycles increases by one
unit and the cycle picks up again with the SID and compressor
movement.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to
enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numeric keypad.
In case the room where the table is installed is of dimensions such that
the complete excursion of some movement is not possible, the test will
stop the movement in proximity of the collision limit.

(Rev. 0)

11-51

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.7

Position 731 Remote service function


Apollo table was designed to be able to transmit data stored in EEprom
and in Flash Eprom to a PC that can be directly connected to the CPU.
This function is still working in the background and not yet available.

APOLLO

11-52

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

11.8

Position 751 Alarms memory


The recorded alarm storage function permits to recreate the equipment
history allowing the identification of anomalies or failures.
This archive is structured in such a way that the occurred diagnosis are
temporarily stored in the RAM, every 10 minutes the RAM "uploads"
these data in the Flash Eprom which, in turn, stores them permanently.
The Flash Eprom memory can store 100 messages that are stored in
progressive order with the LIFO system (last in, first out). The messages
with number 1 will therefore be the most recent to be moved to position
2, 3 , 4 etc. from the following ones. Messages 100 is deleted when a new
messages is stored.
The last 20 messages, those marked by positions from 1 to 20 are in the
long format, i.e. they take up 5 displays (pages) each.

(Rev. 0)

11-53

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-54

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 751: Display alarms data and table positions


Note:

If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range

Line 1
a
b
c
d
e
f

diagnosis position in the memory (from 1 to 20)


diagnosis code
diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
tilting angle in degrees
scan position with respect to the centre in mm (negative head side)

g
h
i
l
m

column angle in degrees


source to film distance in mm
tabletop position with respect to the centre in mm (inside negative side)
main beam movement extension tube in mm
middle beam movement extension tube in mm

Line 2

(Rev. 0)

c
5
D

2
B

11-55

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 752: Display spot film device organs and selections


Note:

If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range

Line 1
n
o
p
q
r
s

shutters opening dimension in mm


gripping opening in mm
distance grid from minimum SW (parking side) in mm
cross.div trolley position from centre in mm
film level limitation dimension for width collimator in cm
film level limitation dimension for width collimator height in cm

t
u
v
z
w
x

film level limitation dimension for iris collimator in cm


cassette size (width x height)
selected cassette subdivision program
number of subdivisions still available
compressor in field = 1 in park = 0
I.I. lift position high = 1 low = 0
selected modality
0 = direct
3 = tomo spot film device

Line 2

y
n
l

APOLLO

o
X

1 = spot film device


2 = digital
4 = tomo digital 5 = angio

11-56

C
m

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 753: Display joystick


Note:

The value 0 means that the joystick is idle, value 1 means that that control was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred

Line 1
Position
j0
j1
j2
j3
j4

Joystick function

Collimator
Angulation
Scan tabletop
Lift
Tilt.- function

height open
centering
out
up
vertical

height close
head side
in
Down
Trendelem.

width open
feet side
head side

width close
reset
feet side

centering

function

Position
j5
j6
j7
j8
j9

Joystick function

source-to-film dist.
compr-0-cent.tbltop
fluoro request
prep request
X-rays request

up
up
on/off
on/off
on/off

down
down

0 machine

centr.tabletop

Line 2

j0

j5

(Rev. 0)

j1
m

j6

d
X

j2
s

j7

11-57

j3

x X

j8

j9

j4
r

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 754: Display digital inputs


NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. As to
inputs from external accessories, 0 means disabled input, 1 enabled input.

Line 1: Groups A B C D E
Line 2: Groups F G H I

0
1
2
11
18

Tube at 0
End of run compressor high
End of run compressor low
Movement active compressor
Single Fault series input

33
34
36
40
41

Photosensor access cassette


Cassette size photosensor
Gripping pressure switch
Button double control vertical tilt.
Button double control Trendel. tilt.

52
53
54
60
61

Button double control tabletop center.


Button double control SID up
Button double control SID down
Dip switch modality 1 selection
Dip switch modality 2 selection

19
20
21
22
23

Generator ready
X-ray ON
Digital workspace
Spot film device workspace
Shelf safety

42
43
44
45
46

Button double control centering tilt.


Button double control lift up
Button double control lift down
Button double control scan head side
Button double control scan feet side

62
63
3
4
35

Dip switch modality 3 selection


Dip switch modality 4 selection
I.I. lift end of run high
I.I. lift end of run low
Trapping access

11 18

B 19 20 21 22 23

C 27 28 29 30 31

D 33 34 36 40 41

F 47 48 49 50 51

G 52 53 54 60 61

H 62 63

APOLLO

35

11-58

27
28
29
30
31

Auxiliary fluoro control


Auxiliary preparation control
R control (II step auxiliary)
main beam/angulation inverter started
middle beam/scan inverter started

47
48
49
50
51

Button double control angulation head side


Button double control angulation feet side
Button double control centering angulation
Button double control tabletop inside
Button double control tabletop outside

55

Button 0 machine

i
E 42 43 44 45 46

55

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 755: Display digital outputs


NOTE: Motors enabling: R cassette, L cassette, shutters and cross subdivision are =1 when the motor is idle and =0 when is running. For all
other outputs 0 means disabled output, 1 enabled output.

Line 1: Groups L M N P Q
Line 2: Groups R S T U V

0
1
10
11
12

Angulation/scan request
Main beam/middle beam inverter request
SID relay up
SID relay down
Main beam brake release

26
27
28
29
30

Height collimator motor open request


Height collimator motor close request
Height collimator motor fast request
Iris collimator motor open request
Iris collimator motor request close

45
46
47
48
49

Tomography speed I
Tomography speed II
7 tomography angle
20 tomography angle
30 tomography angle

69
70
71
16
17

Enable L feeding motor


Enable shutters motor
Enable cross subdivision motor
Request I.I. lift motor high
Request I.I. lift motor low

0
r

(Rev. 0)

1 10 11 12

40 41 42 43 44

13
14
15
18
19

Middle beam brake release


Angulation brake release
Scan brake release
Tabletop motor in request
Tabletop motor out request

31
32
33
34
35

Iris collimator motor fast request


Main beam/angulation invert enable forward
Main beam/angulation invert enable backward
Enabling middle beam/scan inverter forward
Enabling middle beam/scan inverter backwards

50
60
61
62
63

45 tomography angle
Grid in field motor request
Grid in parking pos. motor request
Request gripping opening motor
Request gripping closing motor

20
21
23
24
25

Compressor motor up request


Compressor motor down request
Width collimator motor open request
Width collimator motor close request
Width collimator motor fast request

40
41
42
43
44

fluoro request
X-rays request
Preparation request
Request digital preparation
Request II step

64
65
66
67
68

Direction R feeding motor


Direction L feeding motor
Direction shutter motor
Direction cross subdivision motor
Enable R feeding motor

m 13 14 15 18 19

N 20 21 23 24 25

p 26 27 28 29 30

Q 31 32 33 34 35

u 64 65 66 67 68

45 46 47 48 49

50 60 61 62 63

11-59

69 70 71 16 17

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

When the diagnosis is moved - as a result of the most recent ones being introduced - to a memory position between 21 and 100,
the view is reduced and occupies one single line.
Because the view (page) consists of 2 lines, only 2 diagnosis at a time will be displayed.
The reduced diagnosis are displayed as follows:

PAGE 800: Display reduced diagnosis


Line 1
a
b
c
d

diagnosis position in the memory (from 21 to 100 odd numbers)


diagnosis code
diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)

e
f
g
h

diagnosis position in the memory (from 22 to 100 even numbers)


diagnosis code
diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)

Line 2

APOLLO

11-60

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)

11.9

Position 850 Table cycles memory


The Apollo table stores the activation times of the various movements
besides the number of exposures and, if present, the number of
movements of the I.I. lift.
This memorisation permits to check the wear and tear of the various
organs with respect to the working time, and permits to evaluate whether
preventative maintenance is necessary.
When technical maintenance entailing the replacement of organs takes
place, each movement activation time can be reset independently of the
other movements.
The cycles and times view is shown on 3 pages. To scroll the views, use
button MODE3 to scroll down and button TEST to scroll up.
Following the 3 cycles and times views, 15 reset pages for each data are
available.
The 8-digit exposure number increases each time an exposure is carried
out. This holds for the spot film device, digital and direct modality.
The 7-digit number of cycles of the I.I. lift increases each time the I.I.
ascends or descends.
The activation of all other movements is displayed as time in minutes
and seconds. The common fraction of the 4-digit view indicates the
minutes, the 2-digit decimal fraction indicates the seconds.
In the same way as for the alarm memorisation, data are stored
temporarily in the RAM and every 10 minutes are permanently stored in
the Flash Eprom.
Following is a representation of the view relative to this group.

(Rev. 0)

11-61

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-62

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 850: Display activation cycles (first page)


a
b
c

a
0

d
e

number of exposures (all modalities SFDDIGDIR)


fluoroscopy activation time
number of movements I.I. lift

activation time middle beam motor movement


activation time main beam motor movement

PAGE 851: Display activation cycles (second page)


f
g
h

f
0

(Rev. 0)

i
l

activation time scan motor movement


activation time angulation motor movement
activation time SID motor movement

activation time transversal tabletop motor movement


activation time compressor motor movement

11-63

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

PAGE 852: Display activation cycles (third page)


m
n
o

m
0

APOLLO

p
q

activation time shutters motor movement


activ. time motors R and L belts cassette movement
activation time grid motor movement

activation time cross subdivision motor movement


activation time cassette close motor movement

11-64

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)

From this point the 15 reset pages are displayed as follows:

00000000
F3 = reset
Resetting xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
where:
00000000
Resetting

= number of cycles or memorised time


= description of function to be reset.

By pressing key F3, the data will be reset.

(Rev. 0)

11-65

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

11-66

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Single Fault operating logic

12

SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC


The scope of the Single Fault is a redundant check on the activation
circuits of the table movements, i.e. those functions that may be
dangerous to the patient if they are not under control.
This safety measure is devised in such as way that, if a single fault at a
time occurs (hence the term Single Fault), to the various levels of the
chain the movement consists of, the system can identify the fault and
take the appropriate action that brings the movement to an immediate
halt.
The movements of:

tilting lift

angulation

scan

transversal tabletop movement

source to film distance (SID)

compressor
which are present on the remote-controlled table comply with the abovedescribed SF safety measures.
All controls relative to the above-listed movements, which are present on
both on the console and on the double control, together with the fluoro
and X-ray preparation movements, which are present on the pedal or on
the button, can be realised with a double microswitch (S).
The first S is connected on the open contact (NA) and will be responsible
for the movement request.
The second is connected to a closed contact (NC) and is connected in
series with all second S that feature the SF safety function.
The series connection permits to have a single wire that is sent to an
input that reaches both the main processor and the supervisor.
The control logic bases the SF check on the correspondence of the SF
circuit and of the movements request.
Both conditions must be fulfilled in order to guarantee the activation of
the movement (SF circuit open, movements request circuit close).
Moreover, thanks to the feedback of the potmeters of each "movement
group", the main processor is able to recognise if a movement is active
without an active request.
To complete the redundant checks on all levels, a second processor called
supervisor is connected via serial and parallel port (on the above-listed
movements outputs) to the main processor.

(Rev. 0)

12-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Single Fault operating logic

This permits to check a possible malfunctioning of the main processor


that will have to manage in a consistent way the serial and parallel data
to the output ports.
2 relays called ready relays (K2 and K3) are controlled each by a
processor and the contact are connected in series.
The series of contacts interrupts the supply of the magnetic switch that
supplies the power circuits. If any anomaly is detected, one or both
processors stop exciting the relative relay and interrupt immediately any
movement.
Thanks to such HW and SW logic, each organ responsible for the
movement is monitored and if a failure on the movement activation
circuit occurs, the system can detect and interrupt the movement itself
generating an alarm.

APOLLO

12-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

13

FUNCTIONALITY

13.1

Collision
When activating one or more movements, one part of the equipment
might reach the safety limit beyond which a collision with the walls, the
ceiling or the floor might occur.
This limit, set by means of group 200 cells, represents an imaginary
insuperable software barrier beyond which it is impossible to move for
any part of the equipment.
When a part of the equipment reaches this limit, the movement that
determined this situation is stopped.
The message LIMIT REACHED is displayed until the activation of a
command that informs the operator that some movements might be
disabled.
The parts of the table that can collide with walls, floor or ceiling are: the
image intensifier, the extremities of the main beam (corresponding to the
extremities of the tabletop), the compressor and the tube-collimator
group.
When the extremities of the main beam, the intensifier or the compressor
reach such limit, movements commands that can bring the element into
collision are suddenly inhibited. On the other hand, movements
commands that can bring the components away from the collision point
are free.
When the intensifier reaches the limit towards the floor because of the
scan movement, the message SCAN LIMIT is displayed.
Should this limit be reached because of the tilting movement instead,
depending on where the movement comes from and is directed to
(example from 90 towards 0 or from 0 towards +90 etc.), the piloting
algorithm of the main beam and middle beam motors is adjusted by
activating an anti-collision function.
This will allow the intensifier to move out of the limit area without
stopping the movement and with no need for the operator to adjust the
patient centering position.
As for the tube-collimator group, because of the particular Apollo table
lift-tilting function, all those movements that apparently may not be
dangerous but, if they continued, could increase the risk of collision are
inhibited.
Following are 4 tables with the representations of the various conditions.
Each representation is a "LIMIT REACHED" condition for the tubecollimator group with the right wall, the left wall, the ceiling and the
floor.

(Rev. 0)

13-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

In the first pair of columns are indicated the angles in which the table
(RIB) or the column (ANG) could find themselves when the limit is
reached.
"0" referred to the tilting means that the table is in the horizontal
position, "+" indicates that the table is inclined towards the vertical
position and "-" that the table is inclined towards the Trendelemburg.
"0" referred to the angulation indicates that the column is perpendicular
to the table, "+" indicates that the column is inclined towards the feet
and "-" that it is inclined towards the head.
The 5 following couples of columns report the movements and relative
directions responsible for the direct or indirect movement of the tubecollimator group.
The YES cells indicate that the movement is free, while the NO cells
indicated that the movement is inhibited.
The grey cells indicate that the potential collision will never occur for that
particular combination of tilting angle and angulation angle.

Table showing movements allowed for Tube Right Wall


collision
ANGLES
TILT

ANG

0
0
0

+
+
+
-

APOLLO

SCAN

ANGULATION

TILTING

LIFT

SID

HEAD

FEET

HEAD

FEET

TREND

VERT

UP

DOWN

UP

DOWN

+
-

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

0
0

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

+
+
-

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

13-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

Table showing movements allowed for Tube Left Wall


collision
ANGLES
TILT

ANG

0
0
0

+
+
+
-

SCAN

ANGULATION

TILTING

LIFT

SID

HEAD

FEET

HEAD

FEET

TREND

VERT

UP

DOWN

UP

DOWN

+
-

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

0
0

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

+
+
-

Table showing movements allowed for Tube Ceiling


collision
ANGLES

SCAN

ANGULATION

TILTING

LIFT

SID

TILT

ANG

HEAD

FEET

HEAD

FEET

TREND

VERT

UP

DOWN

UP

DOWN

0
0
0

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

+
-

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

0
0

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

+
+
+
-

(Rev. 0)

+
+
-

13-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

Table showing movements allowed for Tube Floor collision


ANGLES
TILT

ANG

0
0
0

+
+
+
-

APOLLO

SCAN

ANGULATION

TILTING

LIFT

SID

HEAD

FEET

HEAD

FEET

TREND

VERT

UP

DOWN

UP

DOWN

0
0

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

+
+
-

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

+
-

13-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

13.1.1

Anticollision barrier
When the room where the device is installed has irregularities in its
geometry that make necessary supplemental anticollision measures, the
Apollo table can be protected against the risk of collision with these
geometrical irregularities of the room.
Depending from the specific needs it is possible to implement light
barrier sensors or antenna switches that when activated prevent table
components from hitting obstacles of the room.
Connection of these safety devices must be done so that it sends 0V to
input X0-17 when operating conditions are correct; when the safety
barrier is infringed the input must open
Once the anticollision sensor is activated, the movement in progress is
stopped and a message is displayed:
<< LIMIT BARRIER >>
with an intermittent buzzer sound.
To exit this condition and restore normal operation of the system, it will
be possible to activate only the movement that had generated the "limit
barrier" alarm in the opposite direction.
All other commands (joystick on console and keys on the on-board
keypad) are disabled until the message "limit barrier" is removed.
If the limit barrier is activated in the following conditions:
switch on of the system
access to tomography functionality
access to angiographic functionality
during execution of a Tomography test
during execution of a step angiography test
movement to reach a stored position by means of command "0".
the movement is stopped and the active functionality, if any, is reset.
In this condition no joystick or button of the on board keyboard is active,
then to exit from this "limit barrier" lock it is necessary to proceed with a
"bypass" procedure as outlined here below.
Keeping pressed at the same time keys F4 and F5, positioned in the
lower end of the display, ALL movement commands by joystick or on
board keyboard are enabled, making possible to start any movement.
This "bypass" procedure is always possible when the "limit barrier"
condition has been reached.

(Rev. 0)

WARNING:
This "bypass" procedure can be very dangerous since a wrong command
can cause any part of the table to hit the obstacle in the room. Before
giving any movement command it is necessary to check carefully which
movement will bring the table far away from the obstacle. In any case
always activate the movement with great care in short pulses.

13-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

13.2

Compressor
When the compressor is not in the parking position (i.e. when the high
end of run microswitch is released), by enabling the tabletop movement
or the scan movement, the following will occur:

the requested movement is not activated

the compressor goes up for 0.5 sec after complete release of the
compression force.
When the time limit is almost reached, the ascent stops and a
confirmation acoustic signal is issued.
Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired
movement.
The compressor ascent movement is as all Apollo table movements of the
"dead man" type, therefore, if during the compressor ascent the joystick
is released, the movement will stop.
By pushing the joystick once again, the ascent is enabled again for a time
depending on the current compression force without taking into account
the previous partial ascent.
Only after completion of the ascent, the tabletop and scan movements
will be free.
It will then be possible to move the patient and the tube without risk
and, afterwards, compress the patient once again.
When the compressor is in a position different from the idle one, by
activating the angulation movement, the compressor is taken back to the
parking position.
The compressor releases the compression by enabling the cone ascent for
240 msecs if the potmeter exceeds the set dead band.
This happens typically when the patient makes a strong pressure on the
cone, such as by breathing.

APOLLO

NOTE:
Every time the compressor activates the parking switch, the set value of
the compressor force is forced to 5kg.

13-6

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

13.3

Collimator
The Apollo table is designed to accept a square field collimator or a
square field one with iris.
The software pilots the iris axis if the presence of the collimator with iris
is confirmed through the selection of cell 253.
The collimator operating modes are:

automatic

manual.
The automatic mode can in turn be associated to the Hold function.
The selection of the collimator operating mode depends both on the
choice of the operator and on the condition of the "Digital (X0-14)" and
"Spot film device (X0-15)" inputs.
The conditions are:
Inputs

Manual modality

Automatic modality

X0-14 ON (Digital)

NOT POSSIBLE

ACTIVE

X0-15 ON (Spot film device)

SELECTABLE

SELECTABLE

X0-14 OFF X0-15 OFF (Direct)

ACTIVE

NOT POSSIBLE

When the automatic function is active or selected, the Hold function can
be activated or excluded by the operator.

(Rev. 0)

Manual modality

If no program is selected, when the fluoro control is not active, by


means of the joystick it is possible to collimate a format
comprised between the minimum and maximum size.
The shutters inside the spot film device follow the width axis of
the collimator during this limitation.
Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum
format available is equal to the selected I.I..

When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the


format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the
division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be
possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format
comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.
This condition is valid regardless whether the fluoro control is
activated or not.
The shutters inside the spot film device follow the collimator
width axis if a further reduction is performed, except for if a cross
subdivision has been performed

13-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

APOLLO

When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison


with the one of the selected I.I., when the fluoro control is not
active, by means of the joystick, it will be possible to position the
axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the
selected format.
Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum
possible format is the one of the selected I.I. field.
The manual function LED on the console is always on regardless
whether the fluoro control is on or off.
In case the collimation is greater in comparison with the selected
I.I. field, by pressing the fluoro control, the collimation will be
reduced to the I.I. format.
When the fluoro control is released, the shutters go back to the
position in they had before the activation of the fluoro control.
At any time, the automatic collimator function may be selected.
Both axes will bring themselves on the selected I.I. format
position
If the equipment is powered off when the collimator is in the
manual mode, when powering back on, the automatic function
will be activated.
In case an iris collimator is present, the iris limitation control
buttons are not active and the iris will always be circumscribed
at the width and height axes.

Automatic modality

If no program is selected, by means of the joystick, it is possible


to collimate a format comprised between the set I.I. format and
the minimum one.
The shutters inside the spot film device follow the width axis of
the collimator during this limitation.

When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the


format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the
division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be
possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format
comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.
The shutters inside the spot film device follow the collimator
width axis if a further reduction is performed, except the case in
which a cross subdivision has been performed

When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison


with the one of the selected I.I., by means of the joystick, it will
be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between
the minimum and the selected I.I. field.

When the preparation control is activated, the collimator always


positions itself on the selected subdivision format

At any time the manual collimator function may be selected.

If an iris collimator is present, it is possible to collimate in a


circular way by means of the iris control buttons. In this case the
axes and height will be circumscribed to the iris.

13-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

Hold automatic modality


The functioning is identical to the automatic modality except for the
case in which during the fluoro a reduction by means of the joystick
of one of both axes is performed.
In this case when preparation is activated the collimator stays in the
position obtained by means of the joystick.
The same holds for the limitations performed by means of the iris.

Both collimators, with or without iris are fitted with a halogen lamp for
the patient centering without fluoro. By pressing the lamp collimator
button when the light is off the light goes on, by pressing the lamp
collimator button when the light is on the light goes off.
The light goes off anyhow after 45 secs. from the switching on.

(Rev. 0)

WARNING:
The switching on and off cycle of the collimator lamp should not exceed 2
consecutive duty cycles followed by 180 secs. of switching off.
This work cycle ensures that the parts that might get into contact with
the patient do not reach high temperatures due to overheating of the
halogen lamp.

13-9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality

13.4

Table automatic positioning


The Apollo table is designed in such a way to allow to store 3 operating
conditions.
Buttons MODE1, MODE2 and MODE3 permit to store and retrieve these
conditions, the joystick and the 0 key on the console and on the keypad
on board of the table permit to reach stored positions.
The 3 conditions are stored in the EEPROM and contain default values
when the equipment is shipped from the factory and every time that the
potmeters adjustment subroutine (group 100) is accessed.
Note that if the operator has stored positions different from the default
ones, by performing technical maintenance with access to group 100,
such memorised values will be lost. The same will happen if the EEPROM
is replaced.
When all 3 memories are default ones, the 3 LEDs relative to the MODE
buttons are off.
The default positions are as follows:

tilting at 0 with lift at minimum depending on the installed I.I.

scan in the middle

column at 0

SID on minimum

Tabletop in the centre

Compressor in parking position

Slow tilting speed

tabletop and scan movements orientation according to monitor.


To modify these stored values, bring the above-listed movements in the
desired positions and choose the 3 selections (tilting speed and
movement orientation) depending on the need.
After setting the above-mentioned values, press for 5 secs. the MODE
button you want to associate with the actual configuration.
At the end of the 5 secs. the following message is displayed:

POSITIONS STORED
To recall a condition, press the MODE button which the desired setting is
associated to. When the relative LED lights up, hold the joystick or key 0
pressed until the setting is completed.
The completion of such procedure is confirmed with the following
message

POSITIONS REACHED
on the display.
When one or more stored values are present, the last selection (LED
associated to the MODE button on) is maintained both during the
operating mode and at the start.
The joystick and button 0 are not active, therefore the table positioning is
not allowed when the angio step and tomo modalities are active.

APOLLO

13-10

(Rev. 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14

OPERATING MODE

14.1

Spot film device


Input X0-15 is active.
The size of the cassette in the spot film device and the number of possible
exposures are shown on the display once the subdivision program has
been selected.
The collimator can be selected in automatic, automatic+hold, or manual
mode.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by
operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The spot film device performs all the cassette-carrying scan, vibration
grid and shutter movements.
These also follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the
collimator.
It is possible to carry out radiography investigations with return of the
cassette to the park at the end of every exposure to allow a fluoro
investigation or in rapid mode, by performing sequential exposures.

(Rev. 0)

14-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.1.1

"Standard radiography" performance block diagram

Park cassette
I.I. or div. shutters
I.I. or div. collimator

Reset
joystick
activation

I step:
Movement towards posit.
exposure of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
"Prep. request" out ON

Reaching
final position of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
within 8 secs.
YES
II step at the generator
Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES
Grid movement start
Cell 223 time decrease

Cell 223 timeout :


"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.
YES
Exposure in progress.
Pedal release with
"X-ray presence" input
ON
NO
"X-ray presence" input
ON after 6.5 secs.

NO
YES I and II step release
with X-ray end time.

("X-ray presence" OFF)


NO

APOLLO

NO

NO

Alarm
060

Alarm
062

NO

Alarm
064

YES

YES

14-2

I step:
Alarm 067
II step:
Alarm 066

Alarm
065

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.1.2

"Rapid sequence" block diagram

Subdivision and
shutter select.
Park cassette
I.I. or div. shutters
I.I. or div. collimator

I step:
Movement towards
posit. exposure of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
"Prep. request" out ON
Grid movem. start

Reaching final
position of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
within 8 secs.
YES
II step at the generator
Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES
"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.
YES
"X-ray presence" input
(End X-ray) OFF within:
6.5 sec
- "X-ray request" out OFF
YES
Program
end
NO

Pedal release with


program not end
NO
Next Tray

Out "X-ray request" ON

YES "X-ray presence" input


ON within 3 secs.

(Rev. 0)

Reset
joystick activation
alarms

Progr. aborted
Tray expelled

NO

NO

Alarm
061

Alarm
062

NO

Alarm
064

NO

Alarm
065

YES

YES

Alarm
063

NO

14-3

Alarm
064

Tray OUT or
park (sel. esp)

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.2

Standard tomographic
The tomographic mode presents various options: 4 different tomography
angles (7, 20, 30, 45) each of which can be associated with 2 speeds.
The layer can be set with steps of 1 mm from a value 0 (tabletop level) to
a value of 300 mm.
The direction of the tomographic movement can be from left to right or
viceversa and the automatic layer increase function can be selected.
This function automatically increases the level of the layer depending on
the angle set while respecting the "thickness of the cut" as shown below:

7 increase 30 mm

20 increase 20 mm

30 increase 10 mm

45 increase 5 mm
It is possible to carry out tomography in rapid sequence (sequential
tomography).
In this mode all the possible options for standard tomography, the
automatic layer increase is always active.
At the end of the ray angle, the operating mode provides for the
immediate departure of the column for the next tomography.
The exposures will therefore be alternatively from left to right and vice
versa.

APOLLO

14-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.2.1

"Standard tomography" block diagram

Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
Park cassette
I.I. or div. shutters
I.I. or div. collimator

Centering
joystick
activation

I step:
Movement towards
exposure position of:
Cassette, Shutters,
Collimator
Grid movement start
Column towards load
Out "prep. request." ON

Reached final position of:


- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
within 8 secs.
YES
II step at the generator
Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES
Column movement Start

Column in Tomo angle


"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.

YES
Tomography in progress
"X-ray presence" input
OFF with column still at
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO
X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.2 sec from
the end of Tomo (X-ray
request OFF)
NO
YES I and II step release
with column centering

ended
NO

YES
Centering joystick
activation. Column at 0

(Rev. 0)

Reset
joystick
activation

NO

NO

Alarm
060

Alarm
062

NO

Alarm
064

YES

Alarm
068

YES

14-5

Alarm
069

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.2.2

"Sequential tomography" block diagram

Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
Cassette park
I.I. or div. shutters
I.I. or div. collimator

Centering joystick
activation

I step:
Movement towards position
exposure of:
- Cassette, Shutters,
Collimator
Grid movement start
Column towards load
"Prep. request." out ON

Reaching final position of:


- Cassette, Shutters,
Collimator
within 8 secs.
YES
II step at the generator
Input "generat.Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES

Reset joystick
activation

NO

NO

Alarm
060

Alarm
062

Column movement start

Column in Tomo angle


Out "X-ray request" ON

NO

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.

YES
Tomography in progress
"X-ray presence" input OFF
with column still in
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO
X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.2 sec from the
end of Tomo (X-ray request
OFF)
NO
NO

Alarm
064

YES

Alarm
068

YES

Alarm
069

Start for next tomography


X-ray control release

YES
YES End of sequence with column
centering ended

NO

YES
Centering joystick
activation. Column at 0

APOLLO

14-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.3

Direct
Both the X0-14 and X0-15 inputs are deactivated.
The display indicates DIR.
The collimator can only be selected in manual mode.
It is not possible to carry out investigations in fluoro because the fluoro
request output towards the generator is disabled.
It is possible to carry out tests in exposure by operating the pedal
commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The spot film device in this phase does not perform the cassette carrying
scan movement, grid vibration and shutters.
The preparation outputs, II step and exposure are sent to the generator
and without conditioning.
Neither the tomography nor the angio step mode can be selected.

(Rev. 0)

14-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.4

Digital
This mode is possible only if the system is fitted with an image
acquisition, storage and processing device.
The Apollo table has been designed and built to be connected to the
digital systems VDR 2000, DIVA and DIVA-D.
Input X0-14 is active.
The display shows the initials DIG.
The collimator can only be selected in the automatic mode or
automatic+hold.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by
operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The spot film device, if fitted, does not perform the cassette and grid
vibration movement in this phase, while the shutters follow possible
reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator.

APOLLO

14-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.4.1

"Digital radiography" block diagram

Digital ON
No cass or cass in park

Reset
joystick
activation

I step:
Out "prep. request." ON

II step at the generator


Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES
"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.
YES
Exposure in progress
DSI Exposure frequency

YES I and II step release


in any condition

NO

(Rev. 0)

NO

NO

Alarm
062

Alarm
064

14-9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.5

Digital Tomography
The availability of this mode depends on the presence of a digital image
acquisition system (see digital mode).
The digital tomographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests with
the same options of the standard tomographic mode.
The difference consists in the image receiver that will instead be the I.I. of
the film.

APOLLO

14-10

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.5.1

"Digital tomography" block diagram

Digital ON
Tomo ON (ang+speed)

Centering
joystick
activation

Reset
joystick
activation

I step:
Column towards load
Out "prep. request." ON

II step at the generator


Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES
Movement column start

Column in Tomo angle


"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.

YES
X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.2 sec from
the end of Tomo (X-ray
request OFF)
NO
YES I and II step release
with column centering

ended
NO

YES
Centering joystick
activation. Column at 0

(Rev. 0)

NO

Alarm
062

NO

YES

14-11

Alarm
064

Alarm
069

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.5.2

"Digital tomography" block diagram

Digital ON
Tomo ON (ang+speed)

Centering
joystick
activation

Reset
joystick
activation

I step:
Column towards load
Out "prep. request." ON

II step at the generator


Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES

APOLLO

NO

Alarm
062

Column movement start

Column in Tomo angle


"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.

NO

YES
X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.2 sec from
the end of Tomo (X-ray
request OFF)
NO
NO Start for next tomography
X-ray control release

YES
YES I and II step release
with column centering

ended
NO
YES
Centering joystick
activation.
Column at 0

YES

14-12

Alarm
064

Alarm
069

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.6

Angiographic
Also this mode is only possible if the system is fitted with a digital
acquisition system.
The step angiographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests of the
peripheral artery circulation limiting the quantity of contrast liquid
administered to the patient.
The mode provides for the movement of the spot film device-I.I.-tube
group with "steps" established by the size of the selected I.I. field.
When the spot film device-I.I.-tube group completes the movement, the
prep.- II step-exposure make it possible to take digital images.

(Rev. 0)

14-13

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode

14.6.1

"Stepping angio" block diagram

Angiografic mode select.


Digital ON
Scan positioning
Station choice

Reset joystick
activation
alarms

Progr. aborted

I station:
I step:
"Digital prep. request"
out ON

NO

YES
II step at the generator
Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES
"X-ray request" out ON

"X-ray presence" input


ON within 0.36 secs.
YES
Exposure release and
prep. per exposure
interruption

I step: (within 15 sec)


"Digital prep. request"
out ON
Scan movement start
per step
YES

NO

Alarm
062

NO

Alarm
064

NO

Alarm
078

Next station

Scan position reached


Last station
YES
Program
end

APOLLO

14-14

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency end run

15

EMERGENCY END R
RUN
All the table movements are stopped by the software at the limits
established by the potmeters and stored in the EEprom.
All the table movements are equipped with hardware emergency end
runs, in case the software fails to stop for a malfunction, the emergency
microswitch positioned immediately after the end of the run software, is
engaged.
The emergency microswitches are connected in series and, if the circuit
opens, power is cut to the power supply main switch K1L.
All the power circuits are broken ensuring the total safety of the patient,
of the operator and the table if there is a malfunction.
The opening of the main switch K1L also determines the opening of the
"power circuit OK" input (X15 pin 10) that generates diagnosis 080.
The part that has engaged the emergency switch must be identified by
the following table:
Switch

Organ

Side

S32

Main beam-middle beam

Main beam-middle beam collision

S44

SID

LOW

S45

SID

HIGH

S46

Tabletop

Inner

S47

Tabletop

Outer

S48

Middle beam

Minimum

S49

Middle beam

Maximum

S50

Angulation

Head

S51

Angulation

Feet

S52

Scan

Feet

S53

Scan

Head

S54

Main beam

Minimum

S55

Main beam

Maximum

After turning off the system, the reason for this situation being created
must be identified.

(Rev. 0)

15-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency end run

Once the cause has been removed, do the following to restore operation:
1. Press reset button S1 in the electrical cabinet.
2. Turn on the equipment keeping the button pressed down. Wait till
the end of the initialisation cycle.
3. Use the joystick which caused the emergency situations, in the
direction opposite that of the emergency.
4. Release button S1.

APOLLO

WARNING:
If button S1 is pressed, the series of emergency microswitches is
overridden, so if the cause of the failure is not removed, there will be the
danger that the movement follows its run without any electrical
protection.

15-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment

16

HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT

16.1

A3 output PCB
The trimmers used for the collimator Axle Adjustment Movements are on
the A3 output PCB.
Here below you will find information about how to operate on them.

16.1.1

(Rev. 0)

Collimator axle speed adjustment

Trimmer to be adjusted:
R15-R20-R25.

Function:

R15:
width collimator axle speed adjustment

R20:
height collimator axle speed adjustment

R25:
iris collimator axle speed adjustment

Procedure of adjustment:
The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to vary the
speeds of the collimator axle movement motor.
This adjustment varies both the speeds the collimator motors use.
The high speed is the one directly obtained from the relative trimmer
adjustment, and is applied when an axle is at distance from the set
point that is greater than the slowdown band (cells 232, 233, 234).
This speed is always used with activation of the joysticks.
The low speed is applied, by means of a hardware partition
deactivated by a processor command. The low speed is activated
when the axle enters the slowdown zone. LEDs 26, 29 and 32
indicate when the high speed is activated.
The rotation of the trimmer in a clockwise direction increases the
speeds. The trimmers are of the 20 rev. type.
The possibility of monitoring this adjustment is double.
It is in fact possible to verify the adjustment in terms of both
reference voltages at the operating devices and directly on the Power
supply motors.
The reference voltage at the operational devices can be measured
through:

TP10 (gnd) - TP1:


width collimator motor

TP10 (gnd) - TP4:


height collimator motor

TP10 (gnd) - TP7:


iris collimator motor.
and can assume a value between 0 and 8 Vdc that will correspond
proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to
24 Vdc.

16-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment

It will be possible to check the voltage at the ends of the motors


thanks to the :

TP2 - TP3:
width collimator motor

TP5 - TP6:
height collimator motor

TP8 - TP9:
iris collimator motor.
The required adjustment is obtained when the voltage at the ends of
the motors the measured voltage is 24 Vdc throughout the range of
movement at high speed.

APOLLO

16-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment

16.1.2

(Rev. 0)

Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature


reaction)

Trimmer to be adjusted:
R38-R48-R58.

Function:

R38:
width collimator axle torque gain adjustment

R48:
height collimator axle torque gain adjustment

R58:
iris collimator axle torque gain adjustment

Adjustment procedure:
The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to adjust the
torque gain of the gripper movement motor.
The gain increases when the trimmer is turned in a clockwise
direction. The trimmers are twenty turn types.
A good adjustment of this gain makes it possible to get an even
movement that is free of vibrations, since in points where mechanical
hardening of the movement is possible, this gain provides a higher
torque in order to overcome the hardening.
To obtain the adjustment required do the following for each of the
axles:
1. Turn the trimmer of the axle to be adjusted in a clockwise
direction (+).
2. When the axle begins to wobble, turn the trimmer in an
anticlockwise direction.
3. When the self-oscillation stops, turn the trimmer again by 1 turn
in an anticlockwise direction.

16-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment

16.2

Compressor PCB
The activation of the compressor movements, the stop at the
microswitches end run and reaching the set compression forces are
managed by the software and controlled by output PCB A3.
The K14 and K15 relays are responsible for the movement activation.
The control of the motor and the speed change switch S31 are dependent
on PCB A15 (Figure 16-1) that has the function of "managing the power"
of the motor.
There are 3 trimmers on this PCB, each having the function of adjusting
one speed.
The compressor motor in fact is controlled with 3 different speeds i.e. to
ensure that the movement is:

sufficiently high in the compression and patient release zone

sufficiently slow in the stretch from the park to the field

with speed identical to the field entrance speed, when brought from
field to park.
To correctly carry out the adjustment of these 3 speeds the table must be
horizontal and the column taken to 0 degrees.
In this condition the compressor equipment masses act unfavourably,
making the adjustment optimal in any condition.

APOLLO

Adjustment of compression speed


This adjustment must be carried out first of all because it influences
the other two.
With motor in movement in the up/down zone, a voltage of 32 Vdc
must be measured at the test points TP4 and TP5 to be obtained by
means of the adjustment trimmer R38.

Adjustment of speed towards the park


When the compressor is piloted towards the parking position, at the
end of the vertical ascent stretch, a mechanical system starts the
cone rotating speed change switch S31 is activated.
This determines the selection of the input speed.
This speed can be adjusted by means of the trimmer R39 and, with
active movement in this zone, a voltage of 11 Vdc must be read on
the test points TP4 and TP5.

Adjustment of exit speeds from the park


When the compressor is piloted from the parking zone until switch
S31 is active, the input speed, that can be regulated by means of
trimmer R40, is used.
When the movement is active in this stretch, a voltage of 9 Vdc must
be read at test points TP4 and TP5

16-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment

Figure 16-1

(Rev. 0)

16-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

16-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17

THREE-PHASE INVERTER
The inverters in the Apollo table's electrical cabinet are used to control
the 4 three-phase motors responsible for the movements of: tilting, lift,
angulation and scan.
Only 2 motors will be piloted at a time, angulation and scan or main
beam and middle beam.
The output of the inverter in fact is connected to the motor to be
activated through the action of 4 remote switches.
The model of the inverter is:
MITSHUBISHI model FR-E540 3,7K EC.

(Rev. 0)

17-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17.1

Inverter input/output functions


The connection of the inverter, in the specific application for the Apollo
equipment, requires the use of the commands listed below.
Number of the
terminal
L1-L2-L3

U-V-W

SE
5
SD

RUN

STF
STR

A-C

RL

APOLLO

Function
Input of three phase 400 V 50/60 Hz power supply.
Output of 380 V motor power supply with variable frequency
between 0 and 120 Hz.
In the case of inverted motor rotation these outputs must be
reversed.
The inversion of the wires to terminals L1-L2-L3 does not
change the rotation.
This is the pole of the open collector for the RUN signal.
This terminal is polarised at 0 V fixed.
It is the reference 0 V for the V ref. signal (terminal 2).
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the common (reference 0 V) for the STR and STF
signals.
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the output signal from the inverter (active at 0 V)
present when the inverter is in movement (acceleration and
deceleration ramps included).
This output is used to enable the processor to recognise the
end of the ramp.
Only when the inverter has finished the ramp will it be
possible to exchange the connection to the motor by means
of the remote power switch.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the
motor in the "FORWARD" direction.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the
motor in the "BACK" direction.
Input of speed reference from 0 to +10 V dc.
This input's usage dial is determined by parameter Pr73
(Pr73=1 range 0V +10V with motor stop at 0 V).
The speed of the motor will be proportional to the input
signal in this terminal.
This speed will be proportional to the maximum speed set in
parameter Pr38.
This pair of terminals depends on a relay contact inside the
inverter. This contact is closed when the inverter is under
normal functioning conditions. In the case of failure the
contact is open. The contacts of the 2 inverters are
connected in series and depend on an input of input PCB
A2.
When this input is polarised at 0 V, the inverter selects the
second set of operational parameters. The main beam and
middle beam motors actually use a different booster value
from the one necessary for the angulation and scan motors.

17-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17.2

Inverter hardware setting


The inverter FR-E540 - 3,7K EC is designed to accept inputs and pilot
outputs in PNP logic (high active) or NPN (low active).
The selection of this functioning is by means of the SINK / SOURCE
"jumper" on the front of the inverter below the cover.
Since Apollo has been designed in NPN logic, the "jumper" will have to be
in the position SINK.

17.3

Inverter software parameters setting


To permit the use of the FR-E540 - 3,7K EC inverter in the most
various applications, a large number of parameters that can be set are
present in the memory.
Some of these are not active in the specific application on Apollo, so even
if modified they will not change the functioning of the equipment, others
are used but the data contained is the default settings contained in the
basic inverter program.
In conclusion, some parameters are modified with respect to the default
value by Villa Sistemi Medicali to adapt the functioning for use by
Apollo.
The modified parameters and the non-modified parameters but ones that
interact on the functioning of Apollo are listed below and divided into
two groups, while those parameters that do not lead to any effect on the
functioning of the equipment are not mentioned.
For a complete and detailed knowledge of the functioning of the inverter,
it is however possible to consult the dedicated manual, supplied together
with the equipment.

(Rev. 0)

17-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17.3.1
Param.

Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali


Data

Function

Pr.0

20

Boost at the start (1st parameters set). This parameter provides the
motor with a boost at the start that enables the inertia of the system to
be compensated for. Excessive adjustment generates a start of the
movement that is too brusque, while not enough adjustment can cause
the non-start of the movement in load conditions. This value is used for
the angulation and scan motors (see input RL).

Pr.3

50

Rated motor frequency (1st parameter set). The rated frequency


characteristic of the motor used must be inserted in this parameter.

Pr.7

Acceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor


determines the acceleration of the movement depending on the PDI
function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.

Pr.8

Deceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor


determines the deceleration of the movement depending on the PDI
function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.

Pr.9

Activation of the functioning block for excessive current to the motor.


When setting 0, when the threshold of the maximum continuous
current limit that can be delivered by the inverter is exceeded, the
message OL is shown on the display without a stop in operations.

Pr.19

400

Rated motor voltage. The rated voltage characteristic of the motor used
must be included in this parameter.

Pr.20

100

This data is the reference frequency value for the acceleration and
deceleration parameters.

Pr.22

150

Stall prevention extreme current. This parameter indicates the limit of


the current supplied to the motor during functioning at various speeds.

Pr.38

90

Pr.44

See Pr.7 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.

Pr.45

See Pr.8 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.

Pr.46

See Pr.0 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.

Pr.47

50

See Pr.3 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.

Pr.72

13

This the PWM frequency sent to the motor. The value of 13 KHz makes
it possible to eliminate the noise provided by the movement of the
motor guaranteeing however a low risk of EMC emissions.

Pr.73

This the parameter that determines the minimum and maximum value
that the reference analogue input for the speed can assume (0 +10
Vdc).

APOLLO

This the maximum output frequency that the inverter supplies to the
motor when the analogue input of the reference signal is at the
maximum value (+10 V).

17-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

Param.

Data

Pr.74

This is the speed reference analogue signal software filter. The data 0
guarantees an immediate response of the inverter when the Vref
reference signal changes.

Pr.77

This data enables the modification of the parameters.

Pr.79

This is the parameter that makes it possible to enable the functions


of the inverter from outside signals sent to the terminal block.

Pr.180

This makes it possible for the terminal RL to perform the 2nd set of
parameters setting function.

Pr.192

11

This enables the status relay whose exchange contact refers to


terminals A-B-C (used for OK inverter) deactivating it with inverter
OFF or in state of alarm.

Pr.244

(Rev. 1)

Function

This turns on the cooling fans of the power jumper only if the
inverter is running or if the operating temperature has exceeded the
values allowed.

17-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17.3.2

Parameters that maintain the default settings


Listed here below are the parameters that, if modified, could jeopardise
the proper functioning of the equipment.
Nevertheless, this list is given to permit, in case of doubt or
malfunctioning, to check the parameter values are correct.
The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. Consult
the inverter manual provided together with the machine for more
thorough information.

Param. Data

Function

Param. Data

Function

Pr.1

120

Maximum frequency

Pr.66

50

Current limit reduction


frequency

Pr.2

Minimum frequency

Pr.67

Number of alarm resets

Pr.10

DC braking (voltage)

Pr.68

Automatic reset wait time

Pr.11

0.5

DC braking (time)

Pr.69

Reset count zeroing

Pr.12

DC braking (voltage)

Pr.70

Special braking service

Pr.13

0.5

Start frequency

Pr.71

Choice of motor

Pr.14

Load selection curve

Pr.75

14

Select: reset, PU stop

Pr.18

120

Max high speed frequency

Pr.78

Inversion disabling

Pr.21

Accelerat./decelerat. time
increase

Pr.128

PID action selection

Pr.37

Machine speed indication

Pr.150

150

Current threshold level

Pr.39

50

Freq. with ref. 20 mA

Pr.151

Current control time

Pr.41

10

Comparison of rated/real
val.

Pr.152

5.0

Current threshold level 0

Pr.42

Output frequency
threshold

Pr.153

0.5

Current control time 0

Pr.43

9999

Reverse output frequency


threshold

Pr.158

AM terminal variab. select.

Pr.52

PU display variable select.

Pr.160

Parameter group reading


selection

Pr.55

50

Freq. indicat. end of scale

Pr.171

Funct. hour counter reset

Pr.56

Current indic. end of scale

Pr.181

RM terminal funct. select.

Pr.60

Smart mode selection

Pr.182

RH terminal funct. select.

Pr.61

9999 Reference current

Pr.183

MRS terminal funct.


select.

Pr.62

9999 Accelerat. ref. current

Pr.191

FU terminal funct. select.

Pr.63

9999 Deceleration ref. current

Pr.240

PWM soft setting

Pr.65

APOLLO

Automatic reset selection

17-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17.4

Access to parameters for writing


If it is necessary to check the values input into the parameters or modify
them, carry out the operations listed below to access the memory of the
inverter.
1. With the inverter in standby remove the front cover door.
2. Press the MODE key, the display will show the writing Pr.
3. Press the SET key. P.000 will be shown on the screen with
hundreds digit flashing.
4. To modify the hundreds data, press the  keys to increase the values
or  to decrease them.
5. To store the hundreds value press the SET key.
6. The tens digit flashes. To modify the data, press the  keys to
increase the values or  to decrease them.
7. To store the tens value press the SET key.
8. The unit digit flashes. To modify the data, press the  keys to
increase the values or  to decrease them.
9. Press the SET key. At this point the value in the selected parameter
is shown.
10. To modify the data in the memory, press the  keys to increase the
values or  to decrease them.
11. To confirm the modification press the SET key and hold it down for 3
secs. As a confirmation of the successful storage to memory the
display indicates the number of the cell and the value of the data
flashing them alternately.
12. To modify another parameter press the SET key, the next parameter
is shown on the display.
13. To select the required parameter, press the  and  keys and scroll
through the list.
14. Repeat the modification procedure or press the MODE key three
times to exit the routine.

(Rev. 0)

NOTE:
When the MODE key is pressed the first time, the display shows Opnd
and the second, Help.
This display shows the possibility of accessing 2 routines that are not
used.

17-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter

17.5

Procedure for restoring the default parameters


WARNING:
This procedure must only be activated if a malfunction has occurred in
the inverter that has compromised all the settings.
When this procedure is carried out, the default values in the various
parameters will be stored to memory.
So, before activating the functions of the equipment again the data in the
table "Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali"
must be reset and the data contained in the "Parameters that maintain
the default settings" table must be checked.
Carry out the procedure described here below paying the greatest
attention.
1. Following the indications in the "Access to the parameters for
writing " paragraph select the cell Pr.79 and change the data stored
with the value 1.

WARNING:
The inverter is now in PU mode that means enabling movements also
from the keyboard. It is therefore essential to pay the greatest attention
to the use of the keys until the data contained in parameter Pr.79 is
restored at value 2.
2. Press the MODE key, the display shows the PU mode.
3. Press the MODE key, the display shows the help mode.
4. Press the  key four times until getting the indication ALLC. on the
display
5. Pressing the SET key, the data 0 is shown.
6. Press key  to show the data 1.
7. Press for 2 secs. the key SET To confirm. The display begins to flash
indicating that the default settings has been stored to memory.
8. Press the MODE key to exit the reset procedure.
9. Reprogram the data by modifying Pr.77 parameters first followed by
Pr.79 to make access possible to all the other parameters.

APOLLO

17-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS

18

FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS


On the A3 outputs PCB (Figure 18-1) there are groups of leds that
indicate the condition of the active output.

Figure 18-1

(Rev. 0)

18-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS

The correspondence between the various functions and the leds are listed
below.

H1 LED GROUP
LED 1 (Out 0)
LED 2 (Out 1)
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

spare
spare
SID up
SID down
main beam motor brake release
middle beam motor brake release
angulation motor brake release
scan motor brake release

H3 LED GROUP
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)

I.I. lift up
I.I. lift down
tabletop inside
tabletop outside
compressor up
compressor down
collimator lamp on
width collimator opens

H4 LED GROUP
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

APOLLO

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

H2 LED GROUP
LED 9 (Out 8)
LED 10 (Out 9)
LED 11 (Out 10)
LED 12 (Out 11)
LED 13 (Out 12)
LED 14 (Out 13)
LED 15 (Out 14)
LED 16 (Out 15)

LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

3
4
5
6
7
8

K7M and K9M (angulation and scan) remote switch


call
K6M and K8M (main beam and middle beam)
remote switch call
R-L monitor image scan reverse
HIGH-LOW monitor image scan reverse
minimum I.I. field selection
medium I.I. field selection
maximum I.I. field selection
activation of K2 ready relay controlled by the main
processor

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)

width collimator closes


width collimator fast
height collimator opens
height collimator closes
height collimator fast
iris collimator opens
iris collimator closes
iris collimator fast
18-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS

H5 LED GROUP
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

32)
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

40)
41)
42)
43)
44)
45)
46)
47)

tomo 20
tomo 30
tomo 45
X-ray presence without request
Kv automatic-manual fluoro
spare
spare
angio step start

H8 LED GROUP
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

(Rev. 0)

fluoro request
X-ray request
preparation request
digital preparation request
second step preparation request
tomo 1st speed
tomo 2nd speed
tomo 7th speed

H7 LED GROUP
LED 49 (Out 48)
LED 50 (Out 49)
LED 51 (Out 50)
LED 52 (Out 51)
LED 53 (Out 52)
LED 54 (Out 53)
LED 55 (Out 54)
LED 56 (Out 55)

angulation-main beam inverter forward


angulation-main beam inverter back
middle beam-scan inverter forward
middle beam-scan inverter back
spare
spare
spare
spare

H6 LED GROUP
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

56)
57)
58)
59)
60)
61)
62)
63)

motion detection
CCD x0
CCD x4
CCD x8
grid in field
grid in park
cassette gripper opening
cassette gripping

18-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS

H9 FUNCTION LEDS
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED

APOLLO

65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out
(Out

64)
65)
66)
67)
68)
69)
70)
71)

R cassette motor direction


L cassette motor direction
shutter motor direction
cross subdivision motor direction
R cassette motor enabling
L cassette motor enabling
shutter motor enabling
cross subdivision motor enabling

18-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

19

CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC


EXPOSURE RESULTS

19.1

Spot film device adjustment


The spot film device is adjusted and checked when the equipment is
made, however once the installation of the system has been completed, a
further adjustment might be necessary after carrying out the test
radiographs.
To verify the correct position of the cassette, both longitudinal and
transversal, and the shutters it will be necessary to exclude the
automatic function of the collimator that could interfere in limiting the
size.
To open the collimator axles automatically to the maximum size data 1
must be input in cell 262.
When this function is active, the message " Service function active"
appears on the control desk display.

(Rev. 0)

19-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.1.1

Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette


The cassette positioning with regard to the X-ray main beam, during the
exposure program, must be correct.
An effective method for this verification is provided by the following
procedure:
1. Insert a 40x20 cassette and select the subdivision for 4 in line.
2. Run the program and develop the film.
3. The 3 white radiogram separation lines must be the same width. For
this verification the dimension of the separation line, determined by
the shutters is not important, but the constancy of this dimension.
4. Carry out the same test with a 35x35 cassette divided into 3.
If the separation lines are different, it means that the positioning of the
cassette is wrong in all its exposures.
To adjust the positioning properly it is possible to change the gains of the
PDI function in the cell of group 300.
The modification of these parameters can give rise to different effects, so
an intervention should only be made if the functioning of PDI method is
well understood.
The correction can be carried out by working on these data because the
position error is determined by the difference that the error assumes in
function of the length of the run.
Another possibility is that of changing the data in cell 219 which modifies
all the runs of all the subdivisions of the same quantity.
As a further possibility the single runs can be changed through the data
set in the cells of group 400.

APOLLO

19-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.1.2

Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette


By carrying out a series of radiograms with a cross layout of a film 18x24
or 30x24, a continuous line of separation between the upper and lower
radiograms some 2 mm thick must be obtained.
If this does not happen it means that the transversal movement of the
cassette is wrong.
Having determined whether the defect is caused by an asymmetrical
movement with respect to the centre or by too great or too small a
movement for both sides, change the value set in cells 459 and 460.

19.1.3

Checking the positioning of the shutters


WARNING:
During these tests do not carry out limitations of the collimator width by
means of the joystick because the shutters follow the collimator.
Carry out the exposure on films of various formats and various
subdivisions.
All the separator lines, in the various dimensions and subdivisions must
be the same width.
If this not the case, change the data contained in the cells of group 400,
in such a way as to obtain what is required.
It must be remembered that the correction in mm made in the cells has
the effect of increasing and decreasing the final amount, equal to the
value of the correction.
As an example lets consider that a two line subdivision with width
cassette 30 results from a minimum separation line (0.5 mm).
Since the desired value is 2 mm, the quantity of 1.5 mm is added to the
value in cell 549 (the absolute value of which is not important as it
depends on the characteristics of the system).

(Rev. 0)

19-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.2

Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field

19.2.1

Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm

NOTE:
Before starting the alignment of the X-ray beam it is necessary to ensure
the column is properly vertical and the hood is properly horizontal; these
checks can be carried out mechanically through the use of a level.
1. Bring the SID at 100 cm.
2. Place a tool consisting of two concentric rings positioned at a
distance of a few cm over the tabletop surface. If the dedicated tool is
not available, a replacement tool can be made using two elements of
different diameters (see Figure 19-1).
3. Close the collimator to get an image size similar to the size of the tool
(a way that both the circles of the tool are completely represented in
the image).
4. Select fluoro and check the concentricity of the two rings.
5. If the concentricity is correct (Figure 19-1), go to point 8; otherwise
continue.
Tube focus
Collimator centre
Move the collimator in
this direction

min 200 mm

Correct centering

Figure 19-1

APOLLO

19-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

6. Move the collimator with respect to the X-ray tube using the
adjustment possible in the coupling cone: the collimator must move
in the same direction as the circle furthest from the tabletop should
be moved to become concentric with the circle resting on the
tabletop.
7. Move the tool in the same direction to reposition it in the centre of
the X-ray field (in such a way that both circles of the tool are
completely represented in the image).
Repeat points 6 and 7, by trial and error, until the two circles are
centred.
8. Move the SID to 150 cm and check that the centering is maintained;
if this not the case, check the perpendicularity and repeat the
procedure from point 4.
9. Once the concentricity has been achieved at both the SIDs, the
verticality of the alignment between the focus of the X-ray tube and
the centre of the collimator is guaranteed.

(Rev. 0)

19-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.3

Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam

NOTE:
This procedure can be applied to systems that fit the Villa model
collimator. For systems fitting the Ralco mode collimator, refer to the
specific manual.

NOTE:
The light field of the collimator is adjusted in the factory, both for lamp
position and for position of the image surface, so, once the centering of
the X-ray beam has been carried out, the alignment of the X-ray beam
light beam should be guaranteed.
1. To check the alignment of the X-ray beam light beam, turn on the
light field and position 4 wads of absorbent material at the 4 edges of
the light field.
2. Expose a film and check the position of the wads with respect to the
X-ray field produced on the film; the maximum misalignment must
be equal to 3% of the SID in each direction and the sum in the two
orthogonal directions must not be over 4%.
3. If the dimensions do not coincide (indicator of the fact that the
distance of the focus of the X-ray tube from the image surface is
different from that of the lamp collimator from the same plan) the
collimator lamp can be adjusted, remembering that when the lamp
focus is brought towards the mirror, the light main beam gets
narrower while it grows bigger when it is moved away.
Tube focus

Light

Tube focus

Light

Proper alignment

Tube focus

Light

Lamp movement

Mirror movement

Figure 19-2
4. When the optimal alignment between light field and X-ray field is
achieved the next step can be taken to align the X-ray field and image
receiver (I.I. and spot film device group).
These adjustments are easily obtained by moving the tube-collimator
integral group on the support using the adjustment margin allowed.
Furthermore, the I.I. allows a minimum of adjustment in its fixing
APOLLO

19-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

while, in cases where the spot film device needs adjusting (the
adjustment of which is governed by software and set in the factory), it is
necessary to work referring to the procedures for the adjustment and
setting of the data in the relative memory cells in the relative chapter of
this manual. The intervention on the I.I. and spot film device group is
only required when in fact it has not been possible to mechanically
centre these two parts very well, but this happens rarely as this
adjustment is carried out in the factory.

(Rev. 0)

19-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.4

Collimator adjustment
The collimator is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made.
Nevertheless, once installation is complete it will be necessary to check
the size of the collimated formats.
For the fluoro formats check that the axles are tangent to the I.I.
diameter. This check can be carried out by operating the collimator
joystick and checking that the shutters are immediately visible. This
must happen at all the possible zoom levels and the adjustment is made
through the setting of cells 214, 215, 216 and 217.
As far as the exposure is concerned, use the various formats and check
that the collimator covers the selected surface.
Also check that the collimated format does not exceed 3% of the SID, the
format of the film or its subdivision.
To carry out this check, insert a cassette in the spot film device and
position a cassette measuring 35x35 on the tabletop.
Take an exposure and develop the 35x35 film.
By calculating the distance between the film in the spot film device and
the one on the surface check that the collimated format on the 35x35
film corresponds to the size of the film in the spot film device after
making the appropriate proportion.
The correction of the formats can be carried out in 2 ways:

by varying the data set in cell 218 that modifies all the format
collimation positionings except for the minimum position (collimator
closed)

by modifying the adjustment of the potmeter minimum following the


description in the dedicated paragraph.

APOLLO

19-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

20

DIAGNOSTICS AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
Any failure that might occur during the use of the Apollo table is, in the
majority of cases, indicated by a diagnosis message that is shown on the
display.
In some cases however, failures can occur that do not affect the
electronic logic of the processor.
This chapter is therefore divided into two parts: the first describes the
faults deriving from displayed alarms and the way they can be solved, the
second describes faults of different types.

(Rev. 0)

20-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

20-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

20.1
Error

Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses


Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

59

Rays from generator


without fluoro or exposure
request

It was detected the


presence of X-rays coming
from the generator (access
X0-13 active) without
fluoro / exposure request
or X-ray ON is still present
after 700ms from fluoro /
exposure request released

The signal must be at high level when the generator does not emit rays. Check
between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. If the level is low (0 V) even
in conditions of non-emission, remove the wire coming from the generator and
connected to X0-13 and carry out the measurement again. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245
(integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.

60

Timeout collimator
positioning in standard
program

In spot film device mode,


one of the collimator axles
did not reach the position
set point within 8 secs.

When the preparation is activated, the collimator must be positioned over the cassette
size or subdivision. Insert a cassette 35x43, select the panoramic size and press
preparation. Leds 24 and 27 of the output PCB must come on indicating the
movement in progress. 3 cases might occur:
A. one or both of the leds do not come on
B. one or both the leds stay on
C. after some time on, leds 24 and 25 or 27 and 28 flash
Solutions:
A. the width or height motor control circuit is faulty (output PCB)
B. the position feedback circuit or the relative potmeter are faulty
C. the movement is unstable therefore there are mechanical backlashes on the
movement between motor and potmeter or the potmeter is damaged electrically. A
temporary solution to this defect might be the increase of the dead band (cells
229, 230, 231), but this entails an increase in the tolerance of the collimated size).

61

Collimator positioning
timeout in rapid sequence
mode

In rapid sequence mode,


one of the collimator axles
did not reach the position
set point within 8 secs.

The description of alarm 60 applies.

(Rev. 0)

20-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

62

Ready from generator not


present

The generator did not


activate the ready signal
within 3 secs. from the
request of X-ray II step.

Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator has completed the preparation operations. Remove the
wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a jumper directly to the
ground on this terminal. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit
of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.

63

Rapid sequence stopped by The rapid sequence was


operator
interrupted by releasing
the X-ray control.

The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation or Xray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.

64

X-ray on not present from


generator

The generator did not


activate the "X-ray" signal
within 3 secs. from the
fluoro request or within
0,360 secs. in exposure.

Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission. Remove the wire coming from the
generator connected on X0-13 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal
when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the fault might be in
the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21)
of the CPU PCB.

65

Generator did not stop


exposure

The generator X-ray time


A radiography carried out on the spot film device can last for a maximum of 6.5 secs.
lasted longer than 6.5 secs. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission but it must turn off after 6.5 sec
even if the X-ray request remains active. Remove the wire coming from the generator
connected on X0-13 during the emission. If the defect persists, the fault might be in
the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21)
of the CPU PCB.

66

Exposure command
released before end of Xray time

Exposure request released


before X-ray time (input
X0-13) finished.

APOLLO

The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the X-ray request
circuit. Check the X-ray control switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
depending on connector X41. The X-ray request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial
Can-Bus, so there can be no hardware defects at this level.

20-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

67

Preparation command
released before end of Xray time

Preparation request
released before X-ray time
(input X0-13) finished.

The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation


circuit. Check the preparation switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via
serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.

68

Generator stopped X-ray


during Tomo angle

The generator interrupted


the X-ray emission before
the tomography angle was
completed.

A tomography has a X-ray time determined by the presence of the column in the Tomo
angle. The table will therefore be responsible for turning off the emission. Check
between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must stay low (0
V) for the entire time column is in the Tomo angle. Make a jumper between X0-13 and
the ground for the tomography time. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the
pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of
the CPU PCB.

69

Generator did not stop


exposure at the end of
Tomo angle

The generator continued


the X-ray emission for
more than 0.2 secs. after
the X-ray control was
deactivated.

Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with an oscilloscope. The level must go
high when the table deactivates the X-ray request. Check that the generator does not
show a tail of this signal for more than 200 msecs. After the X-ray request of the
table is off. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input
PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.

70

Compressor did not reach


park position in tomo and
angio modality

The compressor did not


reach the parking position
within 30 secs. from the
activation of the control for
the access in tomo or angio
modality access.

The table logic activates the return of the compressor to the park when access to
tomographic or angiographic mode is requested. If the compressor does not reach the
parking position (switch S26, input X15-2 input PCB) the fault might be on the
compressor motor control circuit (outlets X26 pin 9 and 10 output PCB) or on the A15
power PCB. A check must also be made to see that the X15-2 input depending on the
park switch is at a high level when the compressor has activated the switch.

77

Preparation request
interrupted by digital DSI

In angiographic mode the


generator ready signal is
absent.

Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the exposure procedure in digital mode is activated. Remove the wire
coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a direct jumper to ground
on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245
(integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.

(Rev. 0)

20-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

78

Program aborted

In angio modality, the Xray sequence was


interrupted before the set
number of steps was
completed.

The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation and Xray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.

80

General emergency

The power relay (input


The logic recognises that the power circuit of the table is not active if the input X15-10
X15-10) was deactivated by is not at low level. This since this input is dependent on the secondary contact of the
external causes.
power relay K1L. The fault might be caused by a fault in this circuit or by the break in
the series circuit of the movement emergency switch (X0 pin 5 and 6).

82

Anti-crusching circuit
damaged

The anti-pinching control


circuit is interrupted.

83

SFD is disabled

The spot film device was


This signal is not caused by a fault, but by the request of a spot film device function if
cell 261 is set at 1.
disabled, therefore the
adjustment of the
components inside the spot
film device is not possible.

84

I.I. lift not present

The I.I. lift is not present in In potmeter adjustment mode, with cell 133 active an attempt is made to move the I.I.
the system.
lift, but the setting of the presence of this function (cell 255 is 1).

88

Wrong SID

The SID has not been set


properly.

89

The minimum has not


been adjusted.

The minimum position was In potmeter adjustment mode, an attempt is made to store the maximum value of one
not stored.
of the collimator potmeters (width, height or iris), without adjusting the minimum
first.

APOLLO

The table can be configured for the anti-pinching control (cell 254). If the control is
active, the input X14-5 (input PCB) must be active (0 V). Check the membrane circuit
series and the spot film device PCB A10.

In potmeter adjustment mode, with one of the collimator setting axles cells active (ad
117 to 122) an attempt is made to store the value to memory but the SID (shown on
the display) does not correspond to 980 mm.

20-6

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

90

EEPROM data damaged

The RAM has detected a


non-intentional change of
the data in the EEprom.

Each time the equipment is turned on the data in the Eeprom are compared by the
RAM with the previous data through the checksum. If they do not correspond, it
means the data in the Eeprom could be damaged. You are recommended to change
the Eeprom that could be defective.

91

Angulation movement over


max error

During the movement, the


angulation has
accumulated a position
error above the one set in
the cell 311.

The movement of the angulation is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 311. Exceeding this tolerance
might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

92

Scan movement over max


error

During the movement, the


scan has accumulated a
position error above the
one set in cell 329.

The movement of the scan is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must
therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position
is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 329. Exceeding this tolerance might be
caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of
the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the
problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

93

Main beam movement over


max error

During the movement, the


main beam has
accumulated a position
error above the one set in
cell 346.

The movement of the main beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance
might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

(Rev. 0)

20-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

94

Middle beam movement


over max error

During the movement, the


middle beam has
accumulated an error
position over the one set in
cell 346.

The movement of the middle beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real
trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of
the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this
tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or
total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

95

Shutters movement over


max error

During the movement, the


shutters have accumulated
a position error above the
one set in cell 363.

The movement of the shutters is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 363. Exceeding this tolerance
might be caused by a fault in the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

96

Right cassette belt


movement over max error

During the movement, the


right belt has accumulated
a position error above the
one set in cell 375.

The right cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might
be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing
up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to
the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

97

Left cassette belt


movement over max error

During the movement, the


left belt has accumulated a
position error above the
one set in cell 375.

The left cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might
be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing
up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to
the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

APOLLO

20-8

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

98

Cross subdivision
movement over max error

During the movement, the


cross subdivision has
accumulated a position
error above the one set in
cell 399.

The sideway cassette movement by cross subdivision is an axle controlled by PDI logic.
The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay
tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 399. Exceeding
this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a
partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell
is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be
removed.

99

Inverter fault

One or both inverters are


in a warning status,
therefore access X18-1 is
deactivated.

The input X18-1 (input PCB) refers to 0 V when the inverters are in the proper
working conditions. If there is a fault in one of the 2 inverters, the series circuit
dependent on the above mentioned input is deactivated. The cause of the fault must
be verified and removed or the inverter replaced if the fault cannot be repaired.

101

Angulation potmeter under The value detected for the


min
angulation potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be
measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB.

102

Angulation potmeter over


max

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is over the maximum plus
the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the
connector X20-4 of the input PCB.

(Rev. 0)

The value detected for the


angulation potmeter is
above that stored in
Eeprom.

20-9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

103

Scan potmeter under min

The value detected for the


scan potmeter is below
that stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB.

104

Scan potmeter over max

The value detected for the


scan potmeter is above
that stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is over the maximum plus the
value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-5 of the input PCB.

105

Main beam potmeter under The value detected for the


min
main beam potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB.

106

Main beam potmeter over


max

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB.

APOLLO

The value detected for the


potmeter of the main beam
is above that stored in
Eeprom.

20-10

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

107

Middle beam potmeter


under min

The value detected for the


middle beam potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the middle beam potmeter is lower than the
minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB.

108

Middle beam potmeter over The value detected for the


max
potmeter of the main beam
is above that stored in
Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the middle beam is over the
maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB.

111

Transversal tabletop
potmeter under min

The value detected for the


tabletop potmeter is below
that stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit because of the
break in the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply
voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the
converter to be measured on connector X20-7 of the input PCB.

112

Transversal tabletop
potmeter over max

The value detected for the


tabletop potmeter is above
that stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is over maximum plus
the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-7 of the input PCB.

(Rev. 0)

20-11

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

113

SID potmeter under min

The value detected for the


SID potmeter is below that
stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is lower than the minimum
less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-6 of the input PCB.

114

SID potmeter over max

The value detected for the


SID potmeter is above that
stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is over maximum plus the
value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that
because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply
potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-6 of the input PCB.

117

Width collimator potmeter


under min

The value detected for the


width collimator potmeter
is less than the one stored
in EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is lower than
the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB.

118

Width collimator potmeter


over max

The value detected for the


width collimator potmeter
is above that stored in
EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is over
maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB.

APOLLO

20-12

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

119

Height collimator potmeter


under min

The value detected for the


potmeter of the height
collimator is less than the
one stored in EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB.

120

Height collimator potmeter


over max

The value detected for the


potmeter of the collimator
height is above that stored
in EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the height collimator axle potmeter is over
maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB.

121

Iris collimator potmeter


under min

The value detected for the


potmeter of the iris
collimator is less than that
stored in EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the
minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB.

(Rev. 0)

20-13

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

122

Iris collimator potmeter


over max

The value detected for the


potmeter of the iris
collimator is above that
stored in EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB.

123

Compression force
potmeter under min

The value detected for the


compressor potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply potmeter. Check the presence of the
power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the
input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB.

124

Compression force
potmeter over max

The value detected for the


compressor potmeter is
above that stored in
Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the
power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB.

125

Grid potmeter under min

The value detected for the


grid potmeter is below that
stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter grid is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-3 of the input PCB.

APOLLO

20-14

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

126

Grid potmeter over max

The value detected for the


grid potmeter is above that
stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the grid potmeter is over maximum plus the value
set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that,
because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X19-3 of the input PCB.

127

Gripping potmeter under


min

The value detected for the


gripping potmeter is below
that stored in EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping potmeter is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB.

128

Gripping potmeter over


max

The value detected for the


potmeter of the gripping is
above that stored in
EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping movement potmeter is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the
power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB.

129

Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the


under min
cross subdivision potmeter
is below that stored in
EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB.

(Rev. 0)

20-15

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

130

Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the


over max
cross subdivision potmeter
is above that stored in
EEprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision movement is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB.

131

Shutters potmeter under


min

The value detected for the


shutters potmeter is below
that stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutters potmeter is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.

132

Shutters potmeter over


max

The value detected for the


shutters potmeter is above
that stored in Eeprom.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutter potmeter is over maximum plus the
value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that
because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply
potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.

133

The angulation potmeter


max is lower than min

An angulation potmeter
max under the min was
stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

APOLLO

20-16

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

134

The scan potmeter max is


lower than min

A scan potmeter max


under the min was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

135

The main beam potmeter


max is lower than min

A main beam potmeter


max under the min was
stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

136

The middle beam potmeter


max is lower than min

A middle beam potmeter


max under the min was
stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

138

The transversal tabletop


A tabletop potmeter max
potmeter max is lower than under the min was stored.
min

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

139

The SID potmeter max is


lower than min

A SID potmeter max under


the min was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

141

The max of the width


collimator potmeter is less
than the min

A width collimator
potmeter max value under
the min was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

(Rev. 0)

20-17

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

142

The max of the iris


collimator potmeter is
lower than the min

A height collimator
potmeter max value under
the min was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

143

The max of the iris


collimator potmeter is
lower than the min

An iris collimator potmeter


max value under the min
was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

144

The max of the


compression force
potmeter is lower than the
min

A compressor potmeter
max under the min was
stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

145

The grid potmeter max is


lower than min

A grid potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
the min was stored.
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

146

The gripping potmeter max A gripping potmeter max


is lower than min
value under the min was
stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

147

The cross subdivision


A cross subdivision
potmeter max is lower than potmeter max under the
min
min was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

APOLLO

20-18

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

148

The shutter potmeter max


is lower than min

A shutter potmeter max


under the min was stored.

This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

156

Serial line: timeout from


Supervis. to Main P

The data does not arrive on


the serial line from the
supervisor to the main P
for longer than 0.3 secs.

The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in
series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the
line:
supervisor TX
main X-ray

157

Serial line: timeout from


Main P to supervisor

The data does not arrive on


the serial line from the
main P to the supervisor
for longer than 0.3 secs.

The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in
series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the
line:
X-ray supervisor
TX main.

158

Single Fault open at


switch on.

The Single Fault circuit is


not closed, therefore access
X13-24 is not at 0 V when
the table is powered on.

The SF circuit is a series obtained from the modules which the commands are on.
Furthermore there are jumpers where optional components could be connected.
Measure the continuity of the various modules as follows with the table off:
control desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
optional command: X42- with X42-5 (closure jumper)
table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).

(Rev. 0)

20-19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

159

Inputs close at switch on

A joystick or double control When the table is powered up, a check is carried out on the level of all the inputs
button are active when the relative to the commands present on the control desk and the table-mounted
table is powered up.
command. If one of these keys or joystick is detected as active, then an alarm is
present. This could be caused by the incorrect activation of a control during the
powering up procedure or by a faulty command. The state of the table-mounted
control keys (PCB A8), of the X-ray commands (pedal and any button pad), the control
desk joystick (to be checked directly on the buttons on the c.s.) and the soft-touch
keys of the control desk on the connector X44.

160

Single fault open SID up=1 The SID lift control is


/ serial bit 0=0
probably active when the
SF is open and the output
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.

The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor
receives on the parallel SID on command line (diode V7 CPU PCB) the activation
signal, in addition to that of the SF is open. Nevertheless, the serial confirmation of
the movement, sent by the main processor is not present. The cause of the fault might
be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the
parallel line dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the second
hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.

161

Single fault open SID up=0 The supervisor detects the


/ serial bit 0=1
open SF and the serial
confirmation that the SID
lift control is active, but
the output port is not
active.

The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor
recognises that the SF is open and it receives confirmation of the SID on movement
activation on the serial line. On the parallel SID on command line (Diode V7 CPU PCB)
there is not however an activation signal. The cause of the fault might be due to a
defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the parallel line
dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the first hypothesis there
must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.

162

Single fault open SID


down =1 / serial bit 1=0

APOLLO

Corrective measures

The SID control down is


What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
probably active as the SF
The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).
is open and the output
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.

20-20

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

163

Single fault open SID


down =0 / serial bit 1=1

The supervisor detects the


open SF and the serial
confirmation that the SID
down control is active, but
the output port is not
active.

What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).

164

Single fault open tabletop


in=1 / serial bit 2=0

The tabletop in control is


What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
probably active as the SF
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
is open and the output
reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB).
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.

165

Single fault open tabletop


in=0 / serial bit 2=1

The supervisor detects the


open SF and the serial
confirmation that the
tabletop in control is
active, but the output port
is not active.

166

Single fault open tabletop


out=1 / serial bit 3=0

The tabletop out control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
probably active as the SF
reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB).
is open and the output
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.

(Rev. 0)

What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB).

20-21

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

167

Single fault open tabletop


out=0 / serial bit 3=1

The supervisor detects the


open SF and the serial
confirmation that the
tabletop out control is
active, but the output port
is not active.

What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB).

168

Single fault open


compressor up=1 / serial
bit 4=0

The compressor lift control What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
is probably active when the The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
SF is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.

169

Single fault open


compressor up=0 / serial
bit 4=1

The supervisor detects the


open SF and the serial
confirmation that the
compressor lift control is
active, but the output port
is not active.

170

Single fault open


compressor down =1 /
serial bit 5=0

What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The compressor down
The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
control is probably active
the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB).
when the SF is open and
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.

APOLLO

What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).

20-22

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

171

Single fault open


compressor down =0 /
serial bit 5=1

The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
open SF and the serial
the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB).
confirmation that the
compressor down control is
active, but the output port
is not active.

172

Single fault open A5


The A5 inverter enabling
inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active
6=0
when the SF is open and
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.

What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13
(forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).

173

Single fault open A5


The supervisor detects the
inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial
6=1
confirmation that the A5
inverter enabling control is
active, but the output port
is not active.

What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13
(forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).

174

Single fault open A6


The A6 inverter enabling
inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active
7=0
when the SF is open and
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.

What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle
beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards)
and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).

(Rev. 0)

Corrective measures

20-23

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

175

Single fault open A5


The supervisor detects the
inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial
7=1
confirmation that the A6
inverter enabling control is
active, but the output port
is not active.

What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle
beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards)
and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).

180

Single fault close / SID


up=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the SID lift
control output port is
active.

There is HW disagreement regarding the SID up command. The movement activation


circuit dependent on the diode V7 (Cupboard ) is active but the SF series circuit is
closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

181

Single fault closed / SID


down=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the SID down
control output port is
active.

There is HW disagreement regarding the SID down command. The movement


activation circuit dependent on the diode V8 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

182

Single fault close /


tabletop in=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the tabletop
control output port is
active.

There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop in command. The movement


activation circuit dependent on the diode V9 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

183

Single fault close /


tabletop out=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the tabletop
out control output is
active.

There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop out command. The movement


activation circuit dependent on the diode V10 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

184

Single fault close /


compressor up=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the
compressor lift control
output port is active.

There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor up command. The movement


activation circuit dependent on the diode V11 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

185

Single fault closed /


compressor down=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the
compressor down control
output port is active.

There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor down command. The movement


activation circuit dependent on the diode V12 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

APOLLO

20-24

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

186

Single fault close / A5


inverter enable =1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the A5 inverter
enabling command output
port is active.

There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A5


inverter (main beam angulation). The movement activation circuit dependent on
diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is
closed. A check must be made to see which of the circuits the fault is on.

187

Single fault close / A6


inverter enable=1

The SF circuit is not active


(closed) but the A6 inverter
enabling command output
port is active.

There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A6


inverter (middle beam scan). The movement activation circuit dependent on a diodes
V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A
check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.

191

The angulation potmeter


does not move with active
control

The angulation control is


active but potmeter
feedback does not detect
the motion.

The main processor activates the angulation movement control and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and value applied in the formula are set in cells 671 and 672. The
cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
potmeter slip
values of the cells 671 and 672 insufficient.

(Rev. 0)

20-25

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

192

The scan potmeter does


not move with active
control

The scan movement


control is active but the
potmeter feedback does not
detect the motion.

The main processor activates the scan movement command and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 673 and 674.
The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
potmeter slip
values of the cells 673 and 674 insufficient.

193

The main beam potmeter


does not move with active
control

The main beam movement


control is active but the
potmeter feedback does not
detect the motion.

The main processor activates the main beam movement command and at the same
time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
speeds applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is
not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the
difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected
(potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the
alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675
and 676. The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
potmeter slip
values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient.

APOLLO

20-26

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

194

The middle beam potmeter


does not move with active
control.

The middle beam


movement control is active
but the potmeter feedback
does not detect the motion.

The main processor activates the middle beam movement output and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
applied. The alarm generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is applied as per paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first stages of motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675 and 676.
The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
potmeter slip
values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient.

195

The shutter potmeter does


not move with active
control.

The shutters movement


control is active but the
potmeter feedback does not
detect the motion.

The main processor activates the shutter movement output and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed
applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 679 and 680.
The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
potmeter slip
values of the cells 679 and 680 insufficient.

(Rev. 0)

20-27

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

196

Right belt cassette encoder


does not move with active
control

The R cassette movement


belt is active but the
motion is not detected
through the encoder
feedback.

The main processor activates the R cassette movement belt output and at the same
time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
to the applied speeds. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the
speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is
more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When
the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed
detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain
time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in
cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
encoder slip
values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient.

197

Left belt cassette encoder


does not move with active
control

The L cassette movement


belt is active but the
motion is not detected
through the encoder
feedback.

The main processor activates the L cassette movement belt output and at the same
time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
to the applied speed. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the
speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is
more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When
the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed
detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain
time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in
cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
encoder slip
values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient.

APOLLO

20-28

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

198

The cross subdivision


potmeter does not move
with active control.

The cross subdivision


movement control is active
but the potmeter feedback
does not detect the motion.

The main processor activates the cross subdivision movement output and at the same
time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
speed applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is
not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the
difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected
(potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the
alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 685
and 686. The cause of the alarm might be:
mechanical hardening of the movement
potmeter slip
values of the cells 685 and 686 insufficient.

201

Angulation potmeter in
movement without request

There is no angulation
movement control but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the angulation movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 452. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.

(Rev. 0)

20-29

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

202

Scan potmeter in
movement without request

There has been no scan


movement output but
motion has been detected
by the potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the scan movement but has detected through the
potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
cell 453. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up
"moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.

203

Main beam potmeter in


movement without request

There has been no main


beam movement output
but motion is detected by
the potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the main beam movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 454. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the potmeter circuit.
If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up
"moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.

204

Middle beam potmeter in


movement without request

There is no middle beam


movement output but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the middle beam movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 455. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.

APOLLO

20-30

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

206

Transversal tabletop
potmeter in movement
without request

There is no tabletop
movement output but
motion is detected by the
potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the tabletop movement but has detected through
the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 456. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.

207

SID potmeter in movement


without request

There is no SID movement


output but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the SID movement but has detected through the
potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
cell 457. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.

212

Compression force
potmeter in movement
without request

There is no compression
control but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.

The compressor is in park but, through the potmeter feedback, it is seen that there
has been a movement greater than the dead band (cell 226). The cause might have
been a contact of the compression device with an obstacle or by the break in the
electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.

(Rev. 0)

20-31

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

213

Grid potmeter in
movement without request

There is no grid movement


output but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the
potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
cell 449. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electrical potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.

214

Gripping potmeter in
movement without request

There is no gripping
movement control but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.

The main processor has not activated the gripping movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.

215

Cross subdivision potmeter There is no cross


in movement without
subdivision movement
request
control but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.

APOLLO

The main processor did not activate the cross subdivision movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.

20-32

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

216

Shutter potmeter in
movement without request

There is no shutter
movement output but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.

The main processor did not activate the shutter movement but has detected through
the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
excessive noise on the potmeter signal
break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.

218

Transversal tabletop
movement over max error

The transversal tabletop


movement exceeded the
error value set in cell 447.

The movement of the tabletop is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The
speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 235.
As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error
is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is
inserted in cell 447. The alarm can be caused by:
a mechanical slipping of the potmeter
a mechanical hardening of the movement
a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage.

220

SID movement over max


error

The SID movement


exceeded the error value
set in cell 448.

The movement of the SID is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The
speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 236.
As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error
is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is
inserted in cell 448. The alarm can be caused by:
a mechanical slipping of the potmeter
a mechanical hardening of the movement
a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage.

226

Compressor down output


active without feedback
input

No compressor movement
feedback present when
down control is active.

The processor activates the compressor down output but the HW confirmation that
the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.

(Rev. 0)

20-33

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

227

Compressor outputs not


The compressor movement
active with feedback active. feedback is active without
movement commands.

The processor has not activated the compressor lift or descent but the input X32-1
input PCB is active at 0 V.

228

Compressor up output
active without feedback
input

No compressor movement
feedback present when lift
control is active.

The processor activates the compressor lift output but the HW confirmation that the
compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.

231

Single Fault open without


active inputs

SF circuit is open but no


movement control is
recognised.

This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.
Another reason for the alarm might be due to the opening of the SF circuit (input X1324 input PCB).
Check the continuity of the various modules crossed by the SF series circuit:
command desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
optional command: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper)
table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).

232

Single Fault close with


active inputs

One or more movement


controls present but SF
circuit is not active
(closed).

This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.

240

Right cass. belt movement


overcurrent

Right cass. belt motor


movement exceeded
maximum current
threshold.

The R cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation
circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U1 sends
0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 18 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might
be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one
of the components (M5 motor, D1 driver, U1 optoisolator).

APOLLO

20-34

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

241

Left cass. belt movement


overcurrent

Left cass. belt motor


movement exceeded
maximum current
threshold.

The L cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation
circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U2 sends
0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 17 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might
be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one
of the components (M6 motor, D2 driver, U2 optoisolator).

242

Shutters overcurrent

Shutters movement motor


exceeded maximum
current threshold.

The shutter cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current


limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the
optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU PCB). The
exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or
by an electrical fault on one of the components (M8 motor, D5 and D6 drivers, U4
optoisolator).

243

Cross subdivision
overcurrent

Cross subdivision
movement motor exceeded
maximum current
threshold.

The cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation


circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U3
sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 15 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit
might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault
on one of the components (M10 motor, D3 and D4 drivers, U3 optoisolator).

300

Cassette loading error

The cassette did not reach


the format recognition
photocell within 1 sec.

When the cassette transport command is activated, the processor wants to recognise
the activation of the size reading photocell input (X14-2 input PCB) active within 1 sec.
The alarm might be caused by a fault of the format reading photocell circuit or by the
cassette moving too slowly. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser,
the state of the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the
cassette.

301

Grid movement timeout

The grid did not reach the


destination (parking or
position 0) within 8 secs.

The gripping opening/grid parking has a time out of 8 secs.. If the set point is not
reached the cause might be:
an electrical potmeter fault or the mechanical slipping of the same.
dead band too small (cell 227) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point
break in the movement circuit (engine M7, fuse F23, driver D7).

(Rev. 0)

20-35

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

302

Gripping movement
timeout

The gripping did not reach


destination (cassette
opening or closing) within
5 secs.

The gripping opening/closure movement has a time out of 5 secs. If the set point is
not reached the cause might be:
electrical potmeter fault or mechanical slipping of the same (only for the opening)
gripping switch fault (S33 with input X14-4 input PCB) (only for the closure)
dead band too small (cell 228) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point (only
for the opening)
break in the movement circuit (engine M9, fuse F22, driver D8).

303

Cassette size photosensor


not released

Cassette size photosensor


The cassette presence photosensor (input X14-1 input PCB) must be deactivated
is obscured for longer than within 5 sec of the cassette insertion command being activated. The alarm might be
5 secs.
caused by a fault of the photosensor circuit or by the excessively slow movement of the
cassette. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser, the state of the
cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette.

304

Simultaneous drivers
enable

The SW controlled the


gripping open / close
control drivers
simultaneously.

305

I.I. lift movement timeout

The I.I. lift did not reach


When the I.I. lift up movement is activated the input X15-4 (switch S28) must be
destination (up / down end deactivated within 3 secs. When I.I. lift down movement is activated the input X15-5
run) within 3 secs
(switch S29) must be deactivated within 3 secs. The non arrival of the movement at
destination might be caused by a mechanical movement failure or an electronic fault
of one of the circuit components (switch S28 or 29, motor M12, remote switch K4M
and K5M, relay K10 and K11 output PCB).

APOLLO

The opening and gripping commands direct to the driver D8 (activation PCB) to pins 5
and 7 have been sent simultaneously. This causes a short circuit that damages the
components. The circuits dependent on integrated D6 pin 11 and 12 output PCB
should be checked.

20-36

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

306

Timeout shutters or cross


subdivision movement for
I.I. lift call

Cross subdivision or
shutter movements did not
reach position to allow I.I.
lift due to a control error.

When the I.I. lift is called, the shutters must reach the corresponding position to the
min potmeter adjustment and the subdivision movement in a cross must reach the
centre. Failure to reach these set points within 5 secs. activates the alarm. This might
be caused by a fault on one of the control circuits of these movements. See the
description for alarm 302 for the gripping circuits. For the shutters the data of the
cells 300 relative at that moment are valid.

500

RAM-EEPROM: data
missing

A functioning failure
detected on Eeprom.

Data in Eeprom are compared with that in the Ram when the equipment is powered
up. If the check shows that there is no correspondence between the data and the
checksum the alarm is generated. The Eeprom or the Ram must be replaced.

501

RAM-EEPROM: writing
timeout

It was not possible to


transfer data to Eeprom.

In copying Eeprom (cell 702) the writing is not complete. Replace the Eeprom; it is
probably defective.

502

RAM-EEPROM: failed
verification

Data in Eeprom are


different from those in
RAM.

The comparison of the data was wrong during Eeprom copying (cell 702). Replace the
Eeprom; it is probably defective.

503

RAM-EEPROM: wrong
Eeprom reading.

Data in Eeprom cannot be


read.

It was not possible to read the data during Eeprom copying (cell 701). Repeat the
operation or replace the Ram.

907

Button or joystick active at A joystick or double control A key is pressed when the table is powered up. The cause might be due to an operator
switch on
button are active when the error (key or joystick pressed during power up) or by a defective key.
table is powered up.
Check that the control desk keys, keys of the table-mounted panel and pedal have the
NO contact open in the rest position.

910

CAN BUS: timeout from


Control desk to Main P

The Main P does not


receive data from control
desk within 5 secs.

The serial connection between CPU and control desk is broken. Check the connection
cable X8 and the 5 V power supply for the Can bus circuit on integrated circuit D12
pin 2 and 3 for the control desk PCB and on integrated circuit D16 pin 2 and 3 for the
CPU PCB.

915

CAN BUS: timeout from


Main P to control desk

The control desk does not


receive data from Main P
within 5 secs.

The serial connection between CPU and control desk is broken. Check the connection
cable X8 and the 5 V power supply for the Can bus circuit on integrated circuit D12
pin 2 and 3 for the control desk PCB and on integrated circuit D16 pin 2 and 3 for the
CPU PCB.

(Rev. 0)

20-37

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Error

Diagnosis

Cause of the alarm

Corrective measures

961

FLASH-EPROM erasing
failed

The Flash-Eprom was not


erased to reset the
warnings or cycles history.

With page 719 active (deletion of alarm history) or a page between 853 and 867 (cycle
deletion) the flash eprom is not reset. Repeat the operation or replace the flash eprom.

962

FLASH-EPROM writing
failed

The Flash-Eprom did not


allow to write data relative
to history.

The alarm history or the updating of the table cycles is not written on the flash eprom.
Replace the probably defective flash eprom.

999

Data lost in RAM. Check


battery

Data no longer in RAM.

On powering up the Ram is seen to have no data. This might be caused by a defect in
the Ram or the buffer battery with insufficient voltage. Check the ends of the battery
on the CPU PCB to see that there is a voltage of 3.6 V. Change the battery if the
voltage is not high enough or change the Ram if the defect persists.

APOLLO

20-38

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

20.2

Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor

20.2.1

Table

Fault or malfunction

Reason

Corrective measures

During the tilting, the


message "Limit reached" is
often displayed".

The I.I. does not escape the


ascent band and enters the
collision zone.

The tilting function is designed in such a way that the movement continues without
stopping if it the I.I. gets too close to the floor. To ensure this condition a ascent band
is set (cell 208) positioned over the I.I.-floor height. When the I.I. enters the ascent
band, the tilting algorithm is modified and replaced by an anti-collision movement. If
the band is too small, the I.I. might not manage to escape and enter the safety zone.
The data entered in cell 208 must therefore be increased.

The movements controlled


with the table PDI (tilting,
lift, scan, angulation) are not
smooth.

Check parameters not


regulated properly.

If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is
described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are
modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without
jerks and vibrations. Remember that if the reduction is too great the gains make the
positioning inaccurate.

At switch ON the message


"LIMIT BARRIER" is
displayed

Input X0-17 is not connected to If no safety barrier devices are installed in the room, check that input X0-17 is
0V.
connected to 0 V. If safety barrier devices are installed, check that the devices are
functional and that are not activated by elements of the table or any other object

The compressor is not


brought into the field.

Wrong adjustment of the


compression force minimum
photometer.

(Rev. 0)

After checking the proper functioning of the circuit relating to the compressor unit,
access the potmeter adjustment routine and cell 123, check that the value of the
potmeter with pressure-free cone is equal to or less than the stored value. If this not
the case, an effective way for checking whether the non-movement of the compressor
is due to this reason when the table is functioning normally is to increase the value of
the compression force using the dedicated key until the maximum and then to activate
the descent movement. If the movement is activated, the minimum value of the
potmeter must then be adjusted.

20-39

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault or malfunction

Reason

Corrective measures

The horizontal position of


the table is not correct.

The main and middle beam


potmeters have not been
adjusted properly.

The horizontal position of the table is obtained thanks to the combination of the main
and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams
very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4.

The vertical or
Trendelembourg position of
the table is not correct.

The main and middle beam


potmeters have not been
adjusted properly.

The extreme positions of the table are obtained thanks to the combination of the main
and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams
very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4.
Check the data in cells 409 and 410 that determine the stop position.

The equipment does not


come on.

Lack of power supply to the


logical circuits.

Check the presence of the single-phase voltage to the T2 transformer primary. Check
that the thermomagnetic cut out Q1 is closed. Check that the fuse F4 is not broken.

The tomo layer is not


correct.

The geometry of some of the


table's mechanical components
is different.

As the tomography of the Apollo table is completely electronic, the layer position is
calculated by means of an algorithm that takes account of the equipment's mechanical
dimensions. A defect like this can be corrected by modifying the data contained in cell
438.

The main and middle beam


The correspondence of the
collision switch often cuts in. main beam's position with that
of the middle beam is wrong.

APOLLO

A sophisticated algorithm manages the main and middle beam movement used for the
tilting and lift functions. An anti-collision switch prevents a collision being generated
between main and middle beam. If this switch cuts in during movements, the cause
might be:
main and middle beam potmeter adjustment not correct. A new adjustment must
be done as described in paragraph 10.1.4
adjustment of particularly sparse PDI gains. The setting must be changed as
described in paragraph 11.2.1.

20-40

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

20.2.2

Spot film device

Fault or malfunction

Reason

Corrective measures

With I.I. lift high, there is a


collision between I.I. and
shutters.

The adjustment of the shutter


potmeter is wrong.

Recalibrate the shutter potmeter that should have a minimum position corresponding
to an opening of 475 mm, see paragraph 10.1.14.

With I.I. lift high, there is a


collision between I.I. and
cassette guides.

The potmeter adjustment of the Recalibrate the gripping potmeter adjustment that should have a minimum position
gripping opening is wrong.
corresponding to an opening of 463 mm, see paragraph 10.1.12.
If the opening should again prove to be critical, check the set value in cell 228 (dead
band gripping opening) that could be excessive.

The movements controlled


with PDI of the spot film
device (longitudinal cassette,
transversal cassette and
shutters) are not fluid.

Check parameters are not


correctly regulated.

The cassette gripping closure The control circuit is defective.


movement is not working.

(Rev. 0)

If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is
described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are
modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without
jerks and vibrations. Remember that too great a reduction of the gains makes the
positioning imprecise.
Check fuse F22 positioned on the PCB A10 on the spot film device. If it is seen to be
broken check that the gripping devices do not hit the walls of the spot film device
violently, on opening.
Check that pressure switch S33 is not open (input X14-4), when the gripping devices
do not lock on the cassette.

20-41

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault or malfunction

Reason

Corrective measures

The fluoro exposure


time is long.

The positioning of the cassette,


of the shutters or of the
collimator does not occur in the
regular times.

The X-ray request to the generator control is sent when the cassette, shutters and
collimator reach the correct position. It must therefore be checked which of these
three movements is excessively slow in reaching the set point.
If the defect is on the cassette or shutter movements, check to see if there are
mechanical obstacles or take measures on the gains as described in the paragraph
11.2.1.
If the defect is on the positioning of the collimator axles, the cause of this defect might
be due to:
A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in
the paragraph 16.1.2
B- Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the
increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with
the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this
value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.

The cassette is not


recognised.

Wrong use of the cassette or


defect in the size reading
photosensor.

The correspondence between the type of cassette used (cm or inch) and the data in cell
257 is checked. It should be checked that the cassette size used is in the range
allowed (see size table and cm division paragraph 4.2 and inch paragraph 4.3.
If the above is correct, check the functioning of the size reading photosensor (input
X14-2).

APOLLO

20-42

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault or malfunction

Reason

Corrective measures

The 43 cm high cassette is


The gripping device opening is
inserted with difficulty in the not big enough.
spot film device.

The gripping devices do not open wide enough to accommodate the cassette with the
maximum height. Repeat the gripping device opening potmeter adjustment procedure
(see paragraph 10.1.12). Check the value of the cell 228. If this value is too big, the
gripping device might not be able to open wide enough.

The horizontal radiogram


subdivision line (cross
subdivision program) is not
the required size.

The transversal movement of


the cassette is wrong.

Check the adjustment of the cross subdivision potmeter paragraph 10.1.13.


Check the data in cells 459 and 460 and modify it remembering that:
if the separation line is too wide, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
reduced
if the separation line is too narrow, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
increased
modifying the 2 numbers of different quantities modifies the centering of the
cassette.

The vertical radiogram


subdivision lines are not of
the size required.

The positioning of the shutters


is incorrect.

The shutters and the width collimator are responsible for the subdivision of the
radiograms. If the white separation lines do not have a clear border, this means that
the limitation is carried out by the collimator. The collimator potmeters adjustment,
paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8 height, 10.1.9 iris, must therefore be adjusted.
Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the
problem. If the separation line has a clear border, the position of the shutters needs to
be changed.
If the error is constant over all the sizes and subdivisions, the shutter potmeters
adjustment must be adjusted as described in paragraph 10.1.14. If the error is only
present on a few subdivision programs, the cell whose parameter is to be modified
among those present in the table of paragraph 11.3.4.2 must be identified.

The fluoroscopic image


shows one side darker than
the other.

The grid centering is not


correct.

The central position of the grid is not correct, it must be modified by changing the
parameter in cell 220.

(Rev. 0)

20-43

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

20.2.3

Collimator

Fault or malfunction

Reason

Corrective measures

One or more collimator axles


oscillate when achieving the
set point.

HW adjustment wrong or
reduced positioning window.

The causes of this defect may be:


A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in
the paragraph 16.1.2
B- Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the
increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with
the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this
value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.

The exposed collimation is


not correct.

The collimated sizes do not


correspond with film size.

Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8
height, 10.1.9 iris.
Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the
problem.

The fluoro collimation is not


correct.

The collimator sizes do not


correspond with I.I. fields.

Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8
height, 10.1.9 iris.
Check the data in the cells 214217 and modify them according to dimensions of the
fields of the I.I. installed.

APOLLO

20-44

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and cleaning

21

MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING


As all electrical equipments, this unit requires not only a correct usage,
but also maintenance and checks on a regular basis.
This precaution ensures efficient, long-lasting functioning.
Apollo contains mechanical parts such as, bearings, cables and springs
that are subject to natural wear and tear.
To prevent any possibility of risk to the patient or operator, the
equipment must be checked and maintained regularly.
The electromechanical and electronic components contained in the units
must be adjusted correctly to ensure they work perfectly and to give
quality radiographic images, to provide top levels of electrical safety and
contain the dispersion of X-rays within the preestablished limits.
Maintenance can be carried out by the operator (paragraph 21.1) or by
the authorised engineer (paragraph 21.2).

(Rev. 0)

21-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and

21.1

Maintenance the operator can carry out


The check carried out directly by the operator are the following:
Frequency

APOLLO

Method

Daily

Check the working of the light indicators and


LEDs located on the control desk

Visual
inspection

Daily

Functioning of joysticks and buttons located on


the control desk and on the panel on the side of
the table

Visual
inspection

Daily

Absence of contrast liquid residuals

Visual
inspection

Daily

Check smooth flow and noise of movements

Visual
inspection

Integrity of equipment and plates

Visual
inspection

Monthly

Type of check

WARNING:
The operator is recommended to carry out the controls before each
working session.
In case of irregularities, high noisiness of motorised components, or
failures, the operator must immediately notify the Technical Staff.

21-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and cleaning

21.2

Maintenance that can be carried out by the


Authorised Technician
It is recommended that a technician authorised by Villa Sistemi Medicali
services the equipment once a year to ensure it always stays in tip-top
condition.

WARNING:
Preventive and/or corrective operations may only be carried out by Villa
Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel.
At the maintenance stage, the performance of the equipment is checked
and if possible adjusted in line with the indications in the previous
chapters as summarised in the following table:
Type of check

Method

Removal of the casing and cleaning of the parts underneath


with particular attention to the spot film device covers

Visual inspection

X-ray beam centering check

Paragraph 19.2

X-ray field light field correspondence check

Paragraph 19.2

Cassette size subdivision control

Paragraph 19.1

Checking of the movements and operability of the control


desk and the table-mounted control

Visual inspection

Checking of the tilting, angulation and tabletop centering

Visual inspection

Checking of the chain voltage

Chapter 6

Check of the level of lubricant in the reduction units

Practical control

Check of the motor belts

Practical control

Check of the state of main beam bearings, SID

Visual inspection

Check of the state of the spot film device gripping movement


belts

Visual inspection

WARNING:
Only use original spare parts if components need to be replaced.

WARNING:
For cleaning and disinfecting operations carried out directly by the
Authorised Technician, you are recommended to adhere to the
information reported in chapter 8 of the User's manual.

(Rev. 0)

21-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

21-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

22

WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS


The connections of the cables used on the Apollo tables are made with
the use of connectors.
The wiring diagrams are shown with references on them detailing:

Pin number

Connection number

(Rev. 0)

22-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

22.1

List of wiring diagrams and drawings


1.

Interconnection diagram

2.

Power supply diagram

3.

Functional drawing

4.

Cabinet layout

5.

A1 CPU PCB layout

6.

A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram

7.

A2 Input PCB layout

8.

A2 Input PCB wiring diagram

9.

A3 Output PCB layout

10. A3 Output PCB wiring diagram


11. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout
12. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram
13. A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout
14. A8 Table keyboard PCB layout
15. A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram
16. A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout
17. A10 Spot Film Device wiring diagram
18. A11 Base unit connector PCB layout
19. A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram

APOLLO

22-2

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

20. A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout


21. A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram
22. A13 Angulation connector PCB layout
23. A13 Angulation connector wiring diagram
24. A14 Control desk - CPU PCB layout
25. A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram
26. A15 Compressor PCB layout
27. A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram

(Rev. 0)

22-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

22-4

(Rev. 0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

ELECTRONIC CABINET
X33

22V
48V

TRDX+/-

X12

X10

20V

X11

18V

X0

A10
SFD

A12

A10
SFD

A12

INV.

A10
SFD

A11

A12

X13

X14

X15

X16

X17

X18

IN56IN59

I19I29

I33I37
ENC_A
ENC_B
+5V ENC

IN0IN31

X21

IN32IN59
ENC_A
ENC_B

X35

LIM+/-

X36

DC+/-

X37

GR+/-

X38

GN+/-

X39

IA0IA15
+5V ENC
Vref Pot

X68
X44

X5A

OUT40OUT71

X6

O10O11
O18O21
O32O35
TPU0TPU3
VOUTA..VOUTD
ORS
KVA

I12I17

I30I32
10V
10V

X24

I12I17

I12I17

X8
I11

X32

I18b

X22

O8, O9
IK1L, OK1L

A2
INPUT

O2O6
O36O59
KVA

18V

X23

18V
36V

X32

X60B1:Cassette Encoder

X51 R6: Gripping pot.

X61B4/5:Cassette size sensor

X52 R7: Cross subdivision pot.

X62B2:Cass.present sensor (Emitter)

X53 R8: Grid pot.

X63B3:Cass.present sensor (Receiver)

X54 M5: Cass.Right belt

X66S33:Cassette gripping switch

A10
X55 M6: Cass. Left belt Spot Film
Device
X56 M7: Grid motor
PCB
X57 M8: Shutters motor

X58 M9: Gripping motor


X59 M10: Cross subdivision motor

24V

A12
Interconnection
PCB

X21

A11
Interconnection
PCB

X46

(located on
base)

X47 Enable for K2-K3-K4-K5


A2
INPUT

X49 K1L: table emergency

X64,65Not Connected

Spot Film Device


X75S32:Anticoll.Main/Middle beam
Emergency switch
X77S46-47:Table Top Emerg.switches
X78S48-49:Main beam Emerg.switches
X81S54-55:Middle beam Emerg.switches
X83R1:Main beam pot.

X88R11:Table Top pot.

X93Y3:Middle beam brake


X96M13:Table Top motor.

X105

X27

X97

X28

28Vdc

X48
X29

A15
Compressor
PCB

X99

(located on
column)

X70 Main beam motor

X30

Inverter

USMC

X69

X31
X18

X71 Angulation motor


X72 Middle beam motor
X73 Scanning motor

APOLLO Table
X74Emergency switches circuit
X76S44-45:SID Emergency switches
X79S50-51:Angulation Emerg.switches
X80S52-53:Scanning Emerg.switches
X82R10:Compressor pot.
X85R2:Angulation pot.

X45
X45
O0O1

X98

A13
Interconnection
PCB

X104

X45

U32U35

X101,102,103Emergency switches

X84R3:Middle beam pot.


X20

X0
LUMN
CONM

X67Test Point

X92Y1:Main beam brake

24Vdc

X107

X16

X50 R5: Shutters pot.

X26

A3
OUTPUT
PCB

I12I17

X17

A2
INPUT

OUT0OUT39

X5B

X15

A2
INPUT

X4

X19
X68

A2
INPUT

O60O63
OUT64OUT71
TPU0..TPU3

I39I54

PCB

TRSA+/-

A2
INPUT

X44

X3B

I0I10

A2
INPUT

X34

X25

X2
X20

A1
CPU
PCB

X3A

X1
X19

A4
Spot Film Device
Motor Driver
PCB

X14

Collimator

Connector for FLAT CABLE


Screws connectors

A2
INPUT

A8
T.S.O. PCB

D-SUB Connector

X86R4:Scanning pot.
X87R9:SID pot.
X89S25:Tube at 0 position
X90S26-27:Compres.end-run switches
X91S28-29:I.I. lift end-run switches
X94Y2:Angulation brake
X95Y4:Scanning brake

A2
INPUT

X0

(Rev. 0)

CAN BUS
S.F. 24V

X41 Foot switch

Control Desk

X42 Hand switch

X99M11-14:SID,compressor motors
X100S31:L/H speed change switch

APOLLO
Interconnection diagram

1
Page 1 of 1

22-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

APOLLO
Power supply diagram

Code 39849002 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

22-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-9

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 1 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-11

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 2 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-13

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 3 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-15

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 4 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-17

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 5 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-19

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 6 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-21

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 7 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-23

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 8 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-25

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 9 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-27

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 10 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-29

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 11 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-31

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 12 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-33

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 13 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-35

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 14 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-37

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 15 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-39

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 16 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-41

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 17 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-43

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 18 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-45

APOLLO
Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 3

Page 19 of 19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-47

APOLLO
Cabinet layout

Code 83848060 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-49

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB layout

Code 58838150 - Rev. 3

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-51

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 1 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-53

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 2 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-55

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 3 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-57

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 4 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-59

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 5 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-61

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 6 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-63

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 7 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-65

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 8 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-67

APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1

Page 9 of 9

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-69

APOLLO
A2 Input PCB layout

Code 58838152 - Rev. 2

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-71

APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849027 - Rev. 3

Page 1 of 4

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-73

APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849027 - Rev. 3

Page 2 of 4

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-75

APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849027 - Rev. 3

Page 3 of 4

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-77

APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram

Code 39849027 - Rev. 3

Page 4 of 4

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-79

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB layout

Code 58838154 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-81

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 1 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-83

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 2 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-85

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 3 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-87

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 4 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-89

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 5 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-91

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 6 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-93

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 7 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 2)

22-95

APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram

10

Code 39849029 - Rev. 1

Page 8 of 8

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-97

APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB layout

11

Code 58838156 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-99

APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB wiring diagram

12

Code 39849031 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-101

APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB wiring diagram

12

Code 39849031 - Rev. 0

Page 2 of 3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-103

APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB wiring diagram

12

Code 39849031 - Rev. 0

Page 3 of 3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

APOLLO
A7 Filter PCB
schematic and layout

13

Code 58848154 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

22-105

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-107

APOLLO
A8 Table keyboard
PCB layout

14

Code 58843050 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-109

APOLLO
A8 Table keyboard
PCB wiring diagram

15

Code 39849019 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-111

APOLLO
A10 Spot Film Device
PCB layout

16

Code 58833015 - Rev. 1

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-113

APOLLO
A10 Spot Film Device
PCB wiring diagram

17

Code 39849014 - Rev. 1

Page 1 of 2

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-115

APOLLO
A10 Spot Film Device
PCB wiring diagram

17

Code 39849014 - Rev. 1

Page 2 of 2

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

APOLLO
A11 Base unit connector
PCB layout

18

Code 58841050 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

22-117

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-119

APOLLO
A11 Base unit connector
PCB wiring diagram

19

Code 39849010 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

APOLLO
A12 Cabinet connector
PCB layout

20

Code 58848150 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

22-121

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-123

APOLLO
A12 Cabinet connector
PCB wiring diagram

21

Code 39849012 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

APOLLO
A13 Angulation connector
PCB layout

22

Code 58843052 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

22-125

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-127

APOLLO
A13 Angulation connector
PCB wiring diagram

23

Code 39849021 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-129

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB layout

24

Code 58838158 - Rev. 2

Page 1 of 2

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-131

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB layout

24

Code 58838158 - Rev. 2

Page 2 of 2

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-133

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 1 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-135

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 2 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-137

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 3 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-139

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 4 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-141

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 5 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-143

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 6 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 1)

22-145

APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram

25

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1

Page 7 of 7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-147

APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB layout

26

Code 58848152 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-149

APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB wiring diagram

27

Code 39849016 - Rev. 0

Page 1 of 3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-151

APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB wiring diagram

27

Code 39849016 - Rev. 0

Page 2 of 3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings

(Rev. 0)

22-153

APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB wiring diagram

27

Code 39849016 - Rev. 0

Page 3 of 3

APOLLO

Code 6984900703_Rev.2

Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.


Via Delle Azalee, 3
20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy
Tel. (+39) 02 48859.1
Fax (+39) 02 4881844

0051